Mitsubishi Electronics Digital Coffeemaker Fx3U Users Manual FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER'S Positioning Control Edition

FX3U to the manual 3050be44-8381-48f4-a5fc-0b4c6a95dede

2015-02-09

: Mitsubishi-Electronics Mitsubishi-Electronics-Mitsubishi-Digital-Electronics-Coffeemaker-Fx3U-Users-Manual-556540 mitsubishi-electronics-mitsubishi-digital-electronics-coffeemaker-fx3u-users-manual-556540 mitsubishi-electronics pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 242

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

USER'S MANUAL - Positioning Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

Transistor Output
FX3G Main Unit
(Sink Output/
Source Output)
FX3U Main Unit
(Sink Output/
Source Output)
FX3UC Main Unit
(Sink Output/
Source Output)

Line Driver Output
FX3U-2HSY-ADP

Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and
understand this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and
safely.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories:

and

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by
may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it
to the end user.

1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
Reference
• Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation
even during external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an
interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock
circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during selfdiagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC
CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in
such a case.
3) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be
held either on or off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should
be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.

B-4
B-16
B-80

Reference
• Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a
guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power
line.
Noise may cause malfunctions.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the built-in programming port, power
connectors, I/O connectors, communication connectors, or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.

(1)

B-4
B-16
B-80

Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)

2. WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Reference
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or
wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or
initiating operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

B-4
B-32
B-80

Reference
• Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in the manual of the PLC main
unit.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the
PLC will burn out.
• Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in the manual of the PLC main
unit.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the
PLC will burn out.
• Do not wire vacant terminals externally.
Doing so may damage the product.
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the
FX3U/FX3G PLC main unit with a wire 2 mm2 or thicker.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to the manual of the PLC main
unit).
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the
main unit.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation
slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to I/O connectors.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
• Connect input/output cables securely to their designated connectors.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
• Make sure to properly wire the FX3U/FX3G Series main unit and FX0N/FX2N Series extension
equipment in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the
product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.
• Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following
precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the
product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.22 and 0.25 N•m.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly
stressed.
• Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following
precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the
product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.

(2)

B-4
B-32
B-80

Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)

3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Reference
• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through
this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.

B-5
B-81

Reference
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks

B-5
B-81

4. DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
Reference
• Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe
recycling and disposal of your device.

B-16

5. TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS
Reference
• Before transporting the PLC, turn on the power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off.
If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted, the battery-backed data
may be unstable during transportation.
• The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified
in the general specifications of the PLC main unit manual. Failure to do so may cause failures in
the PLC. After transportation, verify the operations of the PLC.

(3)

B-16

(4)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers
User's Manual [Positioning Control Edition]

Manual number

JY997D16801

Manual revision

Date

3/2009

Foreword
This manual describes the "positioning" functions of the MELSEC-F FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers. The manual
has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or
persons is as follows;
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the
local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all
associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance
with established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note:

the term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses
the product associated with this manual

• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions in the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations
with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system,
machine, and apparatus with which a user is using.
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or
use, please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference,
please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will
accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric
distributor.

Registration
• Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)
Functions and Use of This Manual .......................................................................................... 9
Related Manuals ...................................................................................................................... 10
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals .......................................................... 12

A. Common Items
Description of Manual (Common Items) ............................................................................. A-2

1. Introduction

A-3

1.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................A-3
1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning..........................................................................A-4
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4

List of Models ...............................................................................................................................A-4
Main Unit (Transistor Output) .......................................................................................................A-6
Special Adapter ............................................................................................................................A-6
Special Function Unit/Block..........................................................................................................A-7

2. Unit Connection
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

A-9

FX3U PLC ....................................................................................................................................A-9
FX3UC PLC ................................................................................................................................A-10
FX3G PLC ..................................................................................................................................A-11
Individual Operation of Special Function Unit (FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM) ...............................A-11

3. Comparison of Specifications

A-12

3.1 Comparison of Performance Specifications ...............................................................................A-12
3.1.1 Built-in Positioning Function [Main Unit (Transistor Output),
High-Speed Output Special Adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP)] .....................................................A-12
3.1.2 Pulse Output Special Function Block [FX2N-1PG(-E), FX2N-10PG] ..........................................A-13
3.1.3 Positioning Special Function Block [FX3U-20SSC-H] ................................................................A-14
3.1.4 Positioning Special Function Unit [FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM]...................................................A-15

3.2 Comparison of Operation Modes ...............................................................................................A-16

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Table of Contents

B. Built-in Positioning Functions
Description of Manual (Built-in Positioning Function) ...................................................... B-2

1. Outline

B-3

1.1 Features .......................................................................................................................................B-3
1.2 Setup Procedure for Positioning Control......................................................................................B-4
1.3 Version Numbers of Compatible PLCs ........................................................................................B-7
1.3.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method................................................................................B-7
1.3.2 Version check ...............................................................................................................................B-8
1.3.3 Version upgrade history................................................................................................................B-8

1.4 Version Numbers of Compatible Programming Tools..................................................................B-9
1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers ........................................................................................B-10
1.5.1 Assignment of Input Numbers ....................................................................................................B-10
1.5.2 Assignment of Output Numbers .................................................................................................B-12
1.5.3 Connection of High-Speed Output Special Adapter ...................................................................B-14

2. Specifications
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

B-16

General Specifications ...............................................................................................................B-17
Power Supply Specifications......................................................................................................B-17
Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................B-18
Input Specifications ....................................................................................................................B-19
2.4.1 FX3U Series main unit (24V DC Input) .......................................................................................B-19
2.4.2 FX3UC Series main unit (24V DC Input).....................................................................................B-20
2.4.3 FX3G Series main unit (24V DC Input) .......................................................................................B-22

2.5 Output Specifications .................................................................................................................B-23
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4

FX3U Series main unit (Transistor Output) .................................................................................B-23
FX3UC Series main unit (Transistor Output)...............................................................................B-25
FX3G Series main unit (Transistor Output).................................................................................B-27
High-Speed Output Special Adapter [FX3U-2HSY-ADP] ...........................................................B-29

2.6 List of Functions .........................................................................................................................B-30

3. Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening Torques

B-32

3.1 Terminal Board (M3, M3.5) ........................................................................................................B-33
3.1.1 Terminal Screw Size...................................................................................................................B-33
3.1.2 Termination.................................................................................................................................B-33

3.2 European Terminal Board ..........................................................................................................B-34
3.2.1 Cable ..........................................................................................................................................B-34
3.2.2 Termination of Cable End...........................................................................................................B-34
3.2.3 Tool.............................................................................................................................................B-35

3.3 Connector...................................................................................................................................B-35
3.3.1 Cable Connection To Input/Output Connector ...........................................................................B-35
3.3.2 Setup of Input/Output Connection Connector.............................................................................B-36

4. Before Programming

B-38

4.1 List of Related Devices ..............................................................................................................B-38
4.1.1 Special Auxiliary Relays .............................................................................................................B-38
4.1.2 Special Data Registers ...............................................................................................................B-40

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds ..............................................................................B-41
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

Setting of Various Items Regarding Instructions and Speeds ....................................................B-41
Setting of Output Pulse Frequency (DVIT, PLSV, DRVI, and DRVA Instructions).....................B-43
Setting of Zero Return Speed (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)..............................................................B-44
Setting of Creep Speed (DSZR/ZRN Instruction) .......................................................................B-45

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8

Table of Contents

Setting of Maximum Speed ........................................................................................................B-45
Setting of Bias Speed .................................................................................................................B-46
Setting of Acceleration Time.......................................................................................................B-46
Setting of Deceleration Time ......................................................................................................B-47

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands.....................................................................B-48
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9

Forward Rotation Limit and Reverse Rotation Limit ...................................................................B-48
Immediate Stop of Pulse Output (Pulse Output Stop Command Relay) ....................................B-49
Designation of Zero Return Direction (DSZR/ZRN Instruction) ..................................................B-49
CLEAR Signal Output (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)..........................................................................B-51
Change in Logic of Near-Point (DOG) Signal (DSZR Instruction) ..............................................B-52
Change in Logic of Zero-Phase Signal (DSZR Instruction) ........................................................B-52
Designation of Interrupt Input Signal for DVIT Instruction ..........................................................B-53
Change in Logic of interrupt input Signal (DVIT Instruction) ......................................................B-54
Acceleration/Deceleration by PLSV Instruction ..........................................................................B-55

4.4 Current Value and Flag for Monitoring of Operation ..................................................................B-56
4.4.1 Current Value .............................................................................................................................B-56
4.4.2 Completion of Instruction Execution
("Instruction execution complete" Flag, "Instruction execution abnormal end" Flag).............B-57
4.4.3 "Pulse Output Monitor" (BUSY/READY) Flag.............................................................................B-57
4.4.4 "Positioning Instruction Activation" Flag .....................................................................................B-57

4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side........................................................................................B-58
4.5.1 Setting of Common Items Using Program ..................................................................................B-58
4.5.2 Setting of High-Speed Output Special Adapter ..........................................................................B-62

4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side ...................................................B-64
4.6.1 Setting the Command Pulse Method..........................................................................................B-64
4.6.2 Setting of Electronic Gear (For MELSERVO Series)..................................................................B-68
4.6.3 Setting of "Servo Ready" Signal (MELSERVO MR-C Series) ....................................................B-69

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming.....................................................................................B-70
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6

Positioning Instruction Activation Timing ....................................................................................B-70
STOP instruction ........................................................................................................................B-72
Correction of Backlash ...............................................................................................................B-72
"Instruction execution complete" Flag of Positioning Instruction and Completion of PositioningB-72
Operation Error Flag...................................................................................................................B-75
Write during RUN .......................................................................................................................B-75

4.8 Items To Be Observed When Using the Main Unit (Transistor Output) .....................................B-76
4.9 Caution for Using the High-Speed Output Special Adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP)........................B-76
4.10 Format and Execution of Applied Instruction ...........................................................................B-78

5. Operation Test

B-80

5.1 Test Procedure...........................................................................................................................B-82
5.2 Creation of Test Program...........................................................................................................B-86

6. Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

B-88

6.1 Types of Mechanical Zero Return Instructions...........................................................................B-88
6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)............................................................................B-89
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4

Instruction Format.......................................................................................................................B-89
List of Related devices ...............................................................................................................B-90
Function and Operation ..............................................................................................................B-92
Important Points .........................................................................................................................B-98

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)..................................................................................................B-100
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4

Instruction Format.....................................................................................................................B-100
List of Related devices .............................................................................................................B-101
Function and operation.............................................................................................................B-102
Important Points .......................................................................................................................B-106

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

7. Absolute Position Detection System
(Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS Instruction
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

Table of Contents

B-107

Instruction Format ....................................................................................................................B-107
List of Related Devices ............................................................................................................B-108
Function and Operation............................................................................................................B-108
Initial Zero Return.....................................................................................................................B-109
Important Points .......................................................................................................................B-110

8. 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

B-111

8.1 Incremental Method and Absolute Method ..............................................................................B-111
8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction ......................................................................................B-113
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4

Instruction Format.....................................................................................................................B-113
List of Related Devices.............................................................................................................B-114
Function and Operation ............................................................................................................B-116
Important Points .......................................................................................................................B-117

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction......................................................................................B-118
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4

Instruction Format.....................................................................................................................B-118
List of Related Devices.............................................................................................................B-119
Function and Operation ............................................................................................................B-121
Important Points .......................................................................................................................B-122

9. One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

B-123

Instruction Format ....................................................................................................................B-123
List of Related Devices ............................................................................................................B-125
Function and Operation............................................................................................................B-127
Important Points .......................................................................................................................B-132

10. Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction B-134
10.1 Instruction Format ..................................................................................................................B-134
10.2 List of Related Devices ..........................................................................................................B-135
10.3 Function and Operation..........................................................................................................B-137
10.3.1 Operation without Acceleration/Deceleration (M8338 = OFF)................................................B-137
10.3.2 Operation with Acceleration/Deceleration (M8338 = ON) ......................................................B-138

10.4 Important Points .....................................................................................................................B-140

11. Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4

B-141

Instruction Format ..................................................................................................................B-141
List of Related Devices ..........................................................................................................B-142
Function and Operation..........................................................................................................B-144
Positioning Parameter Setting................................................................................................B-145

11.4.1 Positioning Parameter Setting Using GX Developer ..............................................................B-145
11.4.2 Changing of Set Positioning Parameters (Number of Pulses and Frequency).......................B-151

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12. Examples of Programs

Table of Contents

B-153

12.1 Input/Output Assignment........................................................................................................B-154
12.2 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Relay Ladder Program)........................................B-156
12.2.1 Example Program...................................................................................................................B-156

12.3 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)................................B-159
12.3.1 Example Program...................................................................................................................B-159

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method ................................................................................B-163
12.4.1 Setting Using GX Developer...................................................................................................B-163
12.4.2 Operation Program .................................................................................................................B-165

12.5 Program for Reading Current ABS Value Using ABS Instruction ..........................................B-168

13. Troubleshooting

B-169

13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check ....................................................................................................B-169
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6

POWER Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, flashing, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC] .....................B-169
RUN Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC]..........................................B-171
BATT Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3U/FX3UC]...................................................B-171
ALM Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3G] .................................................................B-171
ERROR indicator lamp (Statuses: ON, flashing, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC] .......................B-171
Pulse Output Destination Device and Rotation Direction Output Indicator Lamp...................B-173

13.2 Error Check ............................................................................................................................B-175
13.2.1 Error Code Check Method......................................................................................................B-175
13.2.2 Error Codes ............................................................................................................................B-176

13.3 If the Servo Motor or the Stepping Motor Does Not Operate .................................................B-177
13.4 If Operation Is Stopped at a Wrong Position..........................................................................B-178

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Table of Contents

Appendix: Example Connection
Description of Manual (Example of Connection) .......................................................... Apx.-2

Appendix 1. MELSERVO-J3 Series

Apx.-3

Appendix 1-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output) .........................................................................Apx.-3
Appedix 1-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output .......................................................................................Apx.-3

Appendix 1-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter ..............................................................Apx.-6
Appedix 1-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output (Transistor), and Differential Line Driver Output..................Apx.-6

Appendix 1-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output) ............................................Apx.-7
Appendix 1-3-1 Sink Input and Sink Output .....................................................................................Apx.-7

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Apx.-9

Appendix 2-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output) .........................................................................Apx.-9
Appendix 2-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output .....................................................................................Apx.-9

Appendix 2-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter ............................................................Apx.-12
Appendix 2-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output (Transistor), and Differential Line Driver Output..............Apx.-12

Appendix 2-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output) ..........................................Apx.-13
Appendix 2-3-1 Sink Input and Sink Output ...................................................................................Apx.-13

Appendix 3. MELSERVO-H Series

Apx.-15

Appendix 3-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output) .......................................................................Apx.-15
Appendix 3-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output ...................................................................................Apx.-15

Appendix 3-2 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output) ..........................................Apx.-16
Appendix 3-2-1 Sink Input and Sink Output ...................................................................................Apx.-16

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Apx.-17

Appendix 4-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output) .......................................................................Apx.-17
Appendix 4-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output ...................................................................................Apx.-17

Appendix 4-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter ............................................................Apx.-20
Appendix 4-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output, and Differential Line Driver Output .................................Apx.-20

Warranty...................................................................................................................................... i
Revised History ......................................................................................................................... ii

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Functions and Use of This Manual

Functions and Use of This Manual
The FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC outputs transistor signals from the main unit and also outputs pulses from the
high-speed output adapter and the positioning special function unit/block to the servo motor and stepping
motor to properly control positioning operations.

PLC
FX3G/FX3U Series

Regarding wiring and installation of PLC:
• Hardware manual
(The hardware manual is enclosed with the product.)
• User's Manual - Hardware Edition

Enclosed with
the product
Separate
document

Regarding sequence program:

FX3UC Series

Separate
document

• Programming manual
Regarding positioning function:

Separate
document

• FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC
User's Manual- Positioning Control Edtion

This
document

This document describes the built-in positioning function
setting method, examples of connection, examples of programs, details
for troubleshooting, etc.

Products needed for positioning
Either "INSTALLATION MANUAL" or "USER'S MANUAL" is
enclosed with each product.
For the details, refer to User's Manual [Positioning Control]
(this document) or the product manual.

FX3U-2HSY-ADP

Regarding installation and parts names:
Special function unit/block
FX2N -10PG

STAR
T
DO
G
X
0
X
1
fA
fB

POWE
R
ERRO
R
PG
O
F
P
R
P
CL
R

• INSTALLATION MANUAL
This manual provides the necessary information.
A separate document is needed for programming
details.

Enclosed with
the product

Regarding installation, parts names, operation, and programs:
• USER'S MANUAL
This manual provides the
necessary information.

Supplied with
the product

Separate
document

• HARDWARE/PROGRAMMING MANUAL
This manual provides the necessary information.

Separate
document

Servo motor (stepping motor)

Obtain the instruction manual of the servo motor to be connected to your system.
This manual will be needed to set the parameters for the servo amplifier (drive
unit) or wire the servo amplifier.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Related Manuals

Related Manuals
Refer to this document to perform positioning operations with the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC.
For hardware information on the PLC and for details on the special function units/blocks, refer to the
respective manuals.
Indispensable manual

3Manual that may be indispensable
depending on the purpose of use
Abbreriated document
Title of manual

Document
number

Description

Model code

Manuals for PLC

FX3G Series PLC
Enclosed
with the
product

FX3G Series
HARDWARE MANUAL

FX3G Series
Separate
User’s Manual document
Hardware Edition

The input/output specifications and the
wiring and installation methods for the
FX3G PLC are excerpted from the FX3G
JY997D33401
Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to the FX3G Series
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Provides detailed information on the
hardware, such as the input/output
JY997D31301 specifications and the detailed wiring,
installation, and maintenance methods
for the FX3G PLC.

09R521

FX3U Series PLC
Enclosed
with the
product

FX3U Series
HARDWARE MANUAL

FX3U Series
Separate
User’s Manual document
Hardware Edition

The input/output specifications and the
wiring and installation methods for the
FX3U PLC are excerpted from the FX3U
JY997D18801
Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to the FX3U Series
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Provides detailed information on the
hardware, such as the input/output
JY997D16501 specifications and the detailed wiring,
installation, and maintenance methods
for the FX3U PLC.

09R516

FX3UC Series PLC

Enclosed
with the
product

FX3UC(D,DSS) Series
HARDWARE MANUAL

Enclosed
with the
product

FX3UC-32MT-LT-2
HARDWARE MANUAL

FX3UC Series
Separate
User’s Manual document
Hardware Edition

The input/output specifications and the
wiring and installation methods for the
FX3UC(D,DSS) PLC are excerpted from
JY997D28601 the FX3UC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to the FX3UC Series
User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
The input/output specifications and the
wiring and installation methods for the
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 PLC are excerpted
JY997D31601 from the FX3UC Series User's Manual Hardware Edition.
For details, refer to the FX3UC Series
User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Provides detailed information on the
hardware, such as the input/output
JY997D28701 specifications and the detailed wiring,
installation, and maintenance methods
for the FX3UC PLC.

09R519

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Related Manuals
Indispensable manual

3Manual that may be indispensable
depending on the purpose of use
Abbreriated document
Title of manual

Document
number

Description

Model code

Programming

Describes the basic instructions, applied
instructions, and various devices of the
JY997D16601 FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC to provide
detailed information on sequence
programming.

09R517

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC
Provides detailed information on the
Separate Series User’s Manual JY997D16801 positioning functions incorporated in the
document Positioning Control
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series.
Edition (this document)

09R620

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC
Series Programming
Separate
Manual - Basic &
document
Application Instruction
Edition

Manuals for positioning control

Common
3

Pulse output, positioning
To use each product, also refer to the user's manual (for hardware) of the PLC to be connected to your system.
Describes how to handle the high-speed
Enclosed
output special adapter.
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
with the
JY997D16401 To use this adapter, also refer to the
Installation Manual
product
User's Manual for FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC
Series (for positioning control).
Enclosed
Describes how to handle the 1-axis pulse
FX2N/FX-1PG
JY992D65301
with the
09R610
3
User's Manual
output special function block.
product
Describes how to handle the 1-axis pulse
Enclosed
output special function block.
FX2N-10PG
JY992D91901
with the
Installation Manual
To use this block, also refer to FX2Nproduct
10PG USER’S MANUAL.
Separate FX2N-10PG
Provides detailed information on the 1JY992D93401
09R611
3
document User's Manual
axis pulse output special function block.
Describes how to handle the 1-axis
positioning special function unit.
Enclosed
FX2N-10GM
with the
JY992D77701 To use this unit, also refer to FX2NUser's Guide
product
10GM/FX2N-20GM HARDWARE/
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
Describes how to handle the 2-axis
Enclosed
positioning special function unit.
FX2N-20GM
with the
JY992D77601 To use this unit, also refer to FX2NUser's Guide
product
10GM/FX2N-20GM HARDWARE/
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
Provides detailed information on the 1Separate HARDWARE/
JY992D77801 axis/2-axis positioning special function
09R612
3
document PROGRAMMING
unit.
MANUAL
Enclosed
FX-PCS-VPS/WIN
Describes operation details of FX-PCSwith the
JY992D86801
09R609
3
VPS/WIN Setting/Monitoring Tool.
SOFTWARE MANUAL
product
Describes FX3U-20SSC-H positioning
block specification for I/O, power supply
Enclosed
extracted from the FX3U-20SSC-H User’s
FX3U-20SSC-H
with the
JY997D21101
Installation Manual
Manual.
product
For details, refer to FX3U-20SSC-H
User's Manual.
Separate FX3U-20SSC-H
Describes FX3U-20SSC-H Positioning
JY997D21301
09R622
3
document User's Manual
block details.
Separate FX Configurator-FP
Describes operation details of FX
JY997D21801
09R916
3
document Operation Manual
Configurator-FP Setting/Monitoring Tool.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Generic name or
abbreviation

Description

PLC
FX3G series
FX3G PLC or main unit
FX3U series
FX3U PLC or main unit
FX3UC series
FX3UC PLC or main unit

Generic name for FX3G Series PLC
Generic name for FX3G Series PLC main unit
Generic name for FX3U Series PLC
Generic name for FX3U Series PLC main unit
Generic name for FX3UC Series PLC
Generic name for FX3UC Series PLC main unit

FX2N Series

Generic name for FX2N Series PLC

FX2NC Series

Generic name for FX2NC Series PLC

Expansion board
Expansion board

Generic name for expansion board
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

Special adapter

Generic name for high-speed input/output special adapter, communication special
adapter, and analog special adapter
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

High-speed input/output
special adapter

Generic name for high-speed input/output special adapter

High-speed output special
adapter

Generic name for high-speed output special adapter

2HSY-ADP

FX3U-2HSY-ADP

High-speed input special
adapter

Generic name for high-speed input special adapter

Communication special
adapter

Generic name for communication special adapter

Analog special adapter

Generic name for analog special adapter

Extension unit

Generic name for input/output extension unit and special extension unit
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

Input/output extension unit

Generic name for input extension unit and output extension unit
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

Input extension unit

Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, input extension
block, FX2NC Series input extension block, and FX0N Series input extension block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

Output extension unit

Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, output extension
block, FX2NC Series output extension block, and FX0N Series output extension block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Editon of the main unit to be used for your system.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals

Generic name or
abbreviation

Description

Extension unit
Generic name for special function unit and special function block
Special function unit/block or The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
Special extension unit
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Edition of the main unit to be used for your system.
Special function unit

Generic name for special function unit

Special function block

Generic name for special function block
The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit.
To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware
Edition of the main unit to be used for your system.

Positioning special
function unit

Generic name for the following models:
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM

Positioning special
function block

Generic name for the following models:
FX3U-20SSC-H

Pulse output special
function block

Generic name for the following models:
FX2N-1PG-E, FX2N-1PG, FX2N-10PG

FX2N-1PG(-E)

Generic name for the following models:
FX2N-1PG-E, FX2N-1PG

Optional unit
Extension power supply unit

FX3UC-1PS-5V(for FX3UC series), FX3U-1PSU-5V(for FX3G/FX3U series)

Memory cassette

FX3G-EEPROM-32L, FX3U-FLROM-16, FX3U-FLROM-64, FX3U-FLROM-64L

Battery

FX3U-32BL

FX Series terminal block

FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB, FX-16EX-A1-TB, FX16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB,
FX-16EYT-TB

Input/output cable

FX-16E-500CAB-S, FX-16E-CAB, FX-32E-CAB, FX-16E-CAB-R,
FX-A32E-CAB
represents 150, 300, or 500.

Input/output connector

FX2C-I/O-CON, FX2C-I/O-CON-S, FX2C-I/O-CON-SA

Power cable

FX2NC-100MPCB, FX2NC-100BPCB, FX2NC-10BPCB1

Peripheral unit
Peripheral unit

Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel, and HMI

Programming tool
Programming tool

Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel

Programming software

Generic name for programming software

GX Developer

Generic name for SWD5C-GPPW-J/SWD5C-GPPW-E programming software
package

FX-PCS/WIN(-E)

Generic name for FX-PCS/WIN or FX-PCS/WIN-E programming software package

Handy programming panel
(HPP)

Generic name for FX-30P, FX-20P(-E) and FX-10P(-E)

Setting/Monitoring Tool
Setting/monitoring tool

Generic name for setting/monitoring tool

FX Configurator-FP

Generic name for SWD5C-FXSSC-J/SWD5C-FXSSC-E Setting/monitoring tool

FX-PCS-VPS/WIN(-E)

Generic name for FX-PCS-VPS/WIN or FX-PCS-VPS/WIN-E Positioning module
software package for the FX2N-10GM and FX2N-20GM

HMI
GOT1000 series

Generic name for GT15, GT11 and GT10

GOT-900 series

Generic name for GOT-A900 series and GOT-F900 series

GOT-A900 series

Generic name for GOT-A900 series

GOT-F900 series

Generic name for GOT-F900 series

ET-940 series

Generic name for ET-940 series
Only manuals in Japanese are available for these products

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Generic name or
abbreviation

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals

Description

Drive unit for servo motor and stepping motor
Servo motor

Generic name for servo motor or stepping motor
Including pulse input type servo amplifier and drive unit.

Servo amplifier (drive unit)

Generic name for pulse input type servo amplifier (drive unit)

MELSERVO series

Generic name for MELSERVO-J3, -J2-Super, -J2, -H, and -C series

Other unit
Manual pulse generator

Generic name for manual pulse generator (prepared by user)

Manual

FX3G Hardware Edition

FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition

FX3U Hardware Edition

FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition

FX3UC Hardware Edition

FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition

Programming manual

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic and Applied Instructions
Edition

Communication Control
Edition

FX Series User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Analog Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition

Positioning Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

A
Common Items

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers

Apx.
Example
Connection

User’s Manual [Positioning Control Edition]
A. Common Items

Foreword
"Common Items" describes an outline of the "positioning" functions incorporated in the MELSEC-F FX3G/
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

A-1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

Description of Manual (Common Items)
In this manual, the following formats are used for describing the common items:
Shows the title of the manual and the title
of the division.
This area shows the title of the manual and the title
of the division for the current page.
1st line: Shows the title of the manual.
2nd line: Shows the title of the division.

Shows the title of the chapter
and the title of the section.
This area shows the title of the
chapter and the title of the
section for the current page.

Indexes the title of
division.
The right side of each
page indexes the title
of the division for the
current page.

Shows the reference.
This area shows the
reference document
(the reference document is
shown next to " ").
If the reference is in
"A. Common items"
division, only the chapter,
section, or subsection
number only will be shown
next to " ".
If the reference is in
another division, the chapter,
section, or subsection
number will be shown
next to " " together with
the title of the division.

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

A-2

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

1 Introduction
1.1 Outline

A
Common Items

Introduction

1.1

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This manual describes the positioning control for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
In this chapter, a brief description of the positioning products is provided.

Outline

Servo motor or
stepping motor

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Pulse train signal
Pulse frequency : Transfer speed
Number of
: Transfer distance
pulses
Positioning command

Workpiece (item to be positioned)

A-3

Apx.
Example
Connection

The FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC outputs the pulse signal to the servo motor and the stepping motor to control the
positioning operation.
Increase the pulse frequency to increase the motor speed. Increase the number of pulses to increase the
number of motor revolutions. In other words, set the pulse frequency to determine the workpiece transfer
(positioning) speed.
Set the number of pulses to determine the workpiece transfer distance.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

1.2

1 Introduction
1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning

Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning
To control the positioning operation, use the positioning functions incorporated in the main unit (including the
special adapters), and the special functions units/blocks. The functions, however, depend on the product(s)
being used. Select the optimum product(s) for the purpose of use.

1.2.1

List of Models
The products needed for positioning are shown in the following table:

1. Main unit (transistor output) and special adapter
Model

Number of
axes

Frequency
(Hz)*1

Unit

Output
system

Output method

Reference

Main unit (transistor output)
FX3U/FX3UC
PLC

3-axes
(independent)

10*5 to 100,000

pulse

Open
collector
system

"Pulse train + direction"
method

B. Built-in
Positioning
Function

FX3G PLC

3-axes*3
(independent)

10*5 to 100,000

pulse

Open
collector
system

"Pulse train + direction"
method

B. Built-in
Positioning
Function

pulse

Differential
line driver
system

"Pulse train + direction"
method or "forward/
reverse rotation pulse
train" method

B. Built-in
Positioning
Function

Special adapter
FX3U-2HSY
-ADP*2

A-4

2-axes*4
(independent)

10*5 to 200,000

*1.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor or the stepping motor.

*2.

Can only be connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

"2-axes (independent)" in 14-point and 24-point type main units.

*4.

Connection of 1 adapter can control 2 axes. Connection of 2 adapters can control up to 4 axes.

*5.

The minimum frequency set by the PLSY instruction or PLSV instruction is "1 Hz".
→ For details on the PLSY instruction, refer to the programming manual.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

1 Introduction
1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning

Model

Number of
axes

Common Items

2. Special function block/unit*2
Output
system

Output method

10 to 100,000

pulse
µm
-4
10 inch
mdeg

Open
collector
system

"Pulse train + direction" method or
"forward/reverse rotation pulse train"
method

1 to 1,000,000

pulse
µm
10-4inch
mdeg

Differential
line driver
system

"Pulse train + direction" method or
"forward/reverse rotation pulse train"
method

Special function block

FX2N-1PG(-E)

1-axis

FX2N-10PG

FX3U-20SSC-H

1-axis

2-axes
(independent/
interpolation)

pulse
µm
1 to 50,000,000
10-4inch
mdeg

SSCNET III

Special function unit

FX2N-10GM

1-axis

FX2N-20GM

2-axes
(independent/
interpolation)

1 to 200,000

pulse
µm
10-4inch
mdeg

Open
collector
system

"Pulse train + direction" method or
"forward/reverse rotation pulse train"
method

1 to 200,000

pulse
µm
10-4inch
mdeg

Open
collector
system

"Pulse train + direction" method or
"forward/reverse rotation pulse train"
method

*1.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor or the stepping motor.

*2.

Only FX3U and FX3UC PLC can be connected to the above models.
Refer to the manual of each product.

A-5

Apx.
Example
Connection

Unit

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Frequency
(Hz)*1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2.2

1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning

Main Unit (Transistor Output)
The FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC incorporates positioning functionality.
The PLC can output an open collector type pulse train of up to 100 kHz from the general-purpose outputs
(Y000 to Y002), and it can simultaneously control 3 axes*1.
1-axis

FX3G /FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(Transistor output)

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)
Y000
+
Direction
signal

*1.

1.2.3

2-axes

3-axes

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

Y001
+
Direction
signal

Y002
+
Direction
signal

14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC can only control 2 axes.

Special Adapter
The special adapter can output differential line driver type pulse trains of up to 200 kHz using the positioning
functionality incorporated in the FX3U PLC, and can simultaneously control up to 4 axes.
Up to 2 high-speed output special adapters (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) can be connected to the FX3U PLC.
• The first FX3U-2HSY-ADP uses Y000 and Y004, and Y001 and Y005.
• The second FX3U-2HSY-ADP uses Y002 and Y006, and Y003 and Y007.
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
2nd

1st

FX3U PLC

1-axis

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)
Y000
+
Y004

A-6

Y001
+
Y005

2-axes

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)
Y002
+
Y006

3-axes

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)
Y003
+
Y007

4-axes

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning

• To use high-speed input/output special adapters only (not to use the other special adapters), it is not
necessary to connect the expansion board.
• To use the analog and communication special adapters, be sure to connect the expansion board.

Analog special adapter
Communication special adapter

High-speed output
special adapter

Expansion board

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

• To use high-speed input/output special adapters together with the analog and/or communication special
adapters, connect the high-speed output special adapters to the expansion board (already connected to
the FX3U PLC) first, and then connect the analog special adapters and/or the communication special
adapter(s).

Common Items

Cautions when connecting special adapters

FX3U PLC

Apx.
Example
Connection

RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD

SDB
SG

1.2.4

Special Function Unit/Block
Connect a special function unit/block to the FX3U/FX3UC PLC to control positioning operations. Note that a
special function unit can individually control positioning operations.

1. System configuration for FX3U PLC
Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3U PLC.
FX3U PLC

Special function block
Special function unit
FX 2N -10PG

No.0

ST AR
T
DO
G
X
0
X
1
fA
fB

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

POWE
R
E RRO
R
PG
O
F
P
R
P
CL
R

to No.7

Up to 8 units

→ For details on system configuration, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.

2. System configuration for FX3UC PLC
Up to 8*1 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3UC PLC.
FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is needed to connect special function units/blocks.
FX3UC PLC

FX3UC-1PS-5V
or
FX2NC-CNV-IF

Special function block
Special function unit

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

POWER
ERROR

-10PG

ST ART
DOG
X0
X1
fA
fB

PGO
FP
RP
CLR

No.0

to No.7

Up to 8 units

*1.

Up to 7 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

*2.

The unit/block number begins with "No. 1" when special function unit/blocks are connected to the
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
→ For details on system configuration, refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.

A-7

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

1 Introduction
1.2 Introduction of Products Needed for Positioning

3. Individual operation (FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM)
Without connecting special function units (FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM) to the PLC, you can operate them
individually.
• FX2N-10GM can control one 1-axis servo motor or stepping motor.
• FX2N-20GM can control two 1-axis servo motors or stepping motors.
In addition, up to 48 I/O points can be added.
FX2N-10GM

1-axis

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

A-8

FX2N-20GM

1-axis

2-axes

Servo motor
(Servo amplifier)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Unit Connection

Common Items

2.1 FX3U PLC

A
Common Items

Unit Connection

FX3U PLC

Apx.

FX3U Series

Up to 2 units can be
connected.

Example
Connection

Up to 8 units can be
connected.

2.1

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This chapter displays several block diagrams to illustrate the various combinations of units needed for
positioning control.

A and B show the unit positions.
(For details of installation, refer to the manuals of special adapter and
special function units/blocks.)

(Transistor output)*1

Terminal block (M3)

Servo motor or
Stepping motor*3

European terminal
board

FX3U-2HSY-ADP

POWER
ERROR

FX 2N-10PG

START
DOG
X0
X1
fA
fB

PGO
FP
RP
CLR

- Terminal board (M3)*2
- MIL connector (20-pin)*2
- SSCNET dedicated
connector*2

Special function block
Special function unit

*1.

The relay output type PLCs do not have pulse output.

*2.

The product connects with the servo amplifier via the terminal block, MIL connector (20 pins), or the
SSCNET dedicated connector.

*3.

FX3U-20SSC-H only connects with the servo amplifier (MR-J3B) applicable to SSCNET III.

Note:
• For details on the connectable special function units/blocks and system configuration, refer to the following
manual.
→ Refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.

A-9

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Unit Connection

Common Items

2.2

2.2 FX3UC PLC

FX3UC PLC
FX3UC Series
B

B and C show the unit positions.
(For installation details, refer to the manuals of the special adapter and
special function units/blocks.)

General-purpose output of
main unit

MIL connector (20-pin)

Servo motor or
Stepping motor*2

Up to 8 *3 units can be connected.

FX3UC-1PS-5V

POWER
ERROR

FX2N-10PG

START
DOG
X0
X1
f A
fB

PGO
FP
RP
CLR

FX2NC-CNV-IF

- Terminal board (M3)*1
- MIL connector (20-pin)*1
- SSCNET dedicated
connector*1

Special function
block
Special function
unit

*1.

The product connects with the servo amplifier via the terminal block, MIL connector (20 pins), or the
SSCNET dedicated connector.

*2.

FX3U-20SSC-H only connects with the servo amplifier (MR-J3B) applicable to SSCNET III.

*3.

Up to 7 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

Note:
• Use the FX3UC-1PS-5V (extension power supply unit) only if the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in
the FX3UC PLC does not have enough capacity.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.
• For details on the connectable special extension blocks and system configuration, refer to the following
manual.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.

A - 10

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Unit Connection

Common Items

3 axes can be controlled.

FX3G Series (40-point, 60-point type)

Servo motor or
Stepping motor

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Terminal board (M3)

Apx.
Example
Connection

2 axes can be controlled.

Transistor output (Y000 to Y002)*1

FX3G Series (14-point, 24-point type)

Terminal board (M3)
Transistor output (Y000, Y001)*1

*1.

The relay output type PLCs do not have pulse output.

Only one axis can be
controlled.

Individual Operation of Special Function Unit (FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM)

2 axes can be controlled.

2.4

FX3G PLC

Common Items

2.3

2.3 FX3G PLC

Servo motor or
Stepping motor

MIL connector (20-pin)

FX2N-10GM

MIL connector (20-pin)

FX2N-20GM

Note:
• For details on the connection of the FX2N-10GM or FX2N-20GM and for system configuration, refer to the
following manual.
→ Refer to FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM HARDWARE/PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

A - 11

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

3.1 Comparison of Performance Specifications

Comparison of Specifications
The specifications for each product with positioning functionality are shown below.

3.1

Comparison of Performance Specifications

3.1.1

Built-in Positioning Function [Main Unit (Transistor Output),
High-Speed Output Special Adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP)]
Model

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(Main unit, transistor output)

FX3U-2HSY-ADP*2

Number of control
axes

3 independent axes*1

2 independent axes
(Connect 2 adapters to the main unit to control
4 axes independently.)

Interpolation

Pulse output
system

Open collector system

Differential line driver system

Pulse output
method

"Pulse train + direction" method

"Pulse train + direction" method
"Forward/reverse rotation pulse train" method

Maximum
frequency*3

100,000Hz

200,000Hz

Acceleration
/deceleration type
Unit

pulse

Positioning range

-999,999 to +999,999 (pulse)

Program language

Sequence program

Position data

1 point (set in sequence program)

Connection of
manual pulse
generator
Detection of
absolute position
(Reads out the current value of ABS.)

Others

A - 12

Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration

ABS instruction of the PLC
• To be used when a servo amplifier with a
differential line receiver method is
connected.
• Pulses can be output from the general• To be used when positioning control is
purpose outputs (Y000, Y001, and Y002) of
performed with a FX3U Series relay output
the main unit.
type main unit.
• Used in place of the general-purpose
outputs (Y000 to Y007)*4 of the main unit.

*1.

2 independent axes in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Can only be connected to the FX3U PLC. Up to 2 adapters can be connected.

*3.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor or the stepping motor.

*4.

If 2 adapters are connected, Y000 to Y007 will be used. If only one adapter is connected, Y000, Y001,
Y004, and Y005 will be used. The relation between the output of the FX3U-2HSY-ADP and the output
of main unit is described in the following sections.
→ For high-speed output special adapters, refer to Subsection 1.5.3 and Section 4.9 of
"B. Built-in Positioning Function."

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

Pulse Output Special Function Block [FX2N-1PG(-E), FX2N-10PG]
Model

FX2N-1PG(-E)

Common Items

3.1.2

3.1 Comparison of Performance Specifications

FX2N-10PG

Number of control
axes

1 independent axis
-

Pulse output
system

Open collector system

Differential line driver system

Pulse output
method

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Interpolation

"Pulse train + direction" method
"Forward/reverse rotation pulse train" method

Apx.

100,000Hz

1,000,000Hz

Acceleration/deceleration type

Automatic trapezoidal
acceleration/deceleration

Automatic trapezoidal
acceleration/deceleration, approximate
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration

Unit

pulse, µm, 10-4inch, mdeg

Positioning range

-999,999 to +999,999 [× (Position data magnifi-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 pulse
cation*2) pulse]
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (Position data magnifidata magnification*2) µm]*3
cation*2) µm]
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (Position data magnifidata magnification*2) ×10-4 inch]*3
cation*2) ×10-4 inch]
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (Position data magnifidata magnification*2) mdeg]*3
cation*2) mdeg]

Program language

Sequence program (FROM/TO instruction, BFM direct designation)

Position data

1 point (set in sequence program)

1 point (set in sequence program)*4

Connection of
manual pulse
generator

Connectable
(Differential line driver, open collector)

Detection of
absolute position
(Reads out the current value of ABS.)

Using the ABS instruction of the PLC

Others

• PLC input/output: 8 points occupied
(Points can be either input or output points.)
• PLC input/output: 8 points occupied
• From the dedicated start, the high-speed
(Points can be either input or output points.)
start by 1 ms at shortest is enabled.
• During positioning operation, the operation
speed can be changed.

*1.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor or the stepping motor.

*2.

The position data magnification sets the 1, 10,102 or 103 in parameters.

*3.

The positioning range can be set in the range from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 pulses.

*4.

Up to 200 points (table) can be set for the table operation.

A - 13

Example
Connection

Maximum
frequency*1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Common Items

3.1.3

3 Comparison of Specifications
3.1 Comparison of Performance Specifications

Positioning Special Function Block [FX3U-20SSC-H]
Model

FX3U-20SSC-H

Number of control
axes

2 independent/simultaneous axes

Interpolation

2-axes linear interpolation, 2-axes circular interpolation

Pulse output
system
Pulse output
method

SSCNET III

Maximum
frequency*1

50,000,000Hz

Acceleration/
deceleration type

Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration,
approximate S-pattern acceleration/deceleration

Unit

pulse, µm, 10-4inch, mdeg

Positioning range

-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 pulse
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position data magnification*2) µm]*3
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position data magnification*2) ×10-4 inch]*3
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 [× (Position data magnification*2) mdeg]*3

Program language

Sequence program (FROM/TO instruction, BFM direct designation)*4

Position data

1 point (set in sequence program)*5

Connection of
manual pulse
generator

Connectable (Differential line driver)

Detection of
absolute position
(Reads out the
current value of
ABS.)

Set in parameters

Others

A - 14

• PLC input/output: 8 points occupied
(Points can be either input or output points.)
• During positioning operation, the operation speed and/or target address can be changed.

*1.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor.

*2.

The position data magnification sets the 1, 10,102 or 103 in parameters.

*3.

The positioning range can be set in the range from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 pulses.

*4.

The set data (table information) of the table operation can be set up with FX Configurator-FP Setting/
monitor tool.

*5.

Up to 300 points (table) can be set for the table operation of the X-/Y-/XY-axis.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

Positioning Special Function Unit [FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM]

Common Items

3.1.4

3.1 Comparison of Performance Specifications

FX2N-10GM

FX2N-20GM

Number of control
axes

1 independent axis

2 independent/simultaneous axes

Interpolation

2-axes linear interpolation,
2-axes circular interpolation

Pulse output
system

Open collector system

Pulse output
method

"Pulse train + direction" method
"Forward/reverse rotation pulse train" method

Apx.

200,000Hz
(100,000Hz during interpolation operation)

200,000Hz

Acceleration
/deceleration type

Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration

Unit

pulse, mm, 10-1inch, deg
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (minimum command unit*2) pulse]

Positioning range

-999,999 to +999,999 [× (minimum command unit*3) mm]
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (minimum command unit*3) ×10-1 inch]
-999,999 to +999,999 [× (minimum command unit*3) deg]

Program language

Cod number system, table system

Cod number system

Position data

Block designation: 0 to 99 (100 blocks)*4

Block designation (X-axis, Y-axis, 2 axes
simultaneously): 0 to 99 (100 blocks)

Connection of
manual pulse
generator

Connectable (Open collector system)

Detection of
absolute position
(Reads out the current value of ABS.)

Set in parameters

Others

• PLC input/output: 8 points occupied
(Points can be either input or output points.)
• PLC input/output: 8 points occupied
(Points can be either input or output points.) • This unit can perform positioning operations
independently, without a main unit.
• This unit can perform positioning operations
independently, without a main unit.
• This unit can perform teaching operation.
• This unit can perform teaching operation.
• I/O points can be added (48 points,
maximum).

*1.

Do not exceed the maximum rotation speed of the servo motor or the stepping motor.

*2.

The minimum command unit sets the 1, 10,102 or 103 in parameters.

*3.

The minimum command unit sets the 1, 10-1,10-2 or 10-3 in parameters.

*4.

Up to 100 points (table) can be set for the table operation.

A - 15

Example
Connection

Maximum
frequency*1

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Model

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

FX2N-1PG(-E)

FX2N-10PG

FX2N-10GM

FX2N-20GM

FX3U-20SSC-H

Comparison of Operation Modes
Built-in positioning function
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(main unit)
(Transistor output)
FX3U-2HSY-ADP(FX3U)

3.2

3.2 Comparison of Operation Modes

3*1

The mechanical zero return
start command will start the
zero return operation at the
specified speed. At the completion of the mechanical
zero return, CLEAR signal
will be output.
The DOG search function
applies for each unit.

−

Start

The SETR instruction will
return the workpiece to the
set electric origin at the maximum speed set the parameters.

3*2

Target
position

The start command will start
the operation at the specified operation speed, and the
operation will stop at the target position.

The start command will
transfer the workpiece to the
distance (1) at operation
speed (1), and then to the
distance (2) at operation
speed (2).

−

The workpiece will change
speed with the specified
transfer distance.
The figure shows an example
a of 3-speed operation.

−

Positioning operation
pattern

Description

Jogging operation
Jogging speed

Speed

Start
JOG
command

Mechanical zero return
Zero return
speed

Speed Creep
speed

Origin DOG input: ON Start
CLEAR
signal

Electric zero return
Speed

Maximum speed

Electric origin

If the forward/reverse rotation command is input, the
motor will rotate in the forward/reverse direction.

1-speed positioning
Speed

Operation speed

Start
Transfer distance

2-speed positioning
Operation
speed(1)

Speed

Start Transfer
distance(1)

Operation
speed(2)

Transfer
distance(2)

Multi-speed operation
Speed

3
3*3

−

3*4

3*5

Start

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.

A - 16

Drive to Increment instruction is used.
Drive to Increment/Absolute instructions are used.
The pulse train function of the linear interpolation instruction will perform this operation.
The pulse train function of the linear interpolation instruction will perform this operation.
Operation of only one axis is possible.
The table operation (continuous operation) function will perform this operation.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

3.2 Comparison of Operation Modes

FX3U-20SSC-H

FX2N-20GM

FX2N-10GM

FX2N-10PG

Apx.
−

−

3*6

The operation starts at operation speed (1) by the start
command. During the operation, if the speed reduction
command is input, the speed
will decelerate to operation
speed (2). After that, the
operation will be continued at
operation speed (2) until the
stop command is input.

−

Interrupt 2-speed positioning
If interrupt input(1) turns ON,
(Interrupt 2-speed constant
the speed will be reduced to
quantity feed)
the 2nd speed. After that, if
Transfer
interrupt input(2) turns ON,
distance
Speed 1st speed
the operation will decelerate
2nd speed
to stop after moving the
specified transfer distance at
Start
Interrupt Interrupt
the 2nd speed.

−

X-axis

Interrupt stop
Speed

Speed

Operation speed

Interrupt
input

Target
position

If an interrupt input turns ON,
during a positioning operation, the speed will decelerate and the operation will
stop.

Interrupt 1-speed positioning
(Interrupt 1-speed constant
If an interrupt input turns ON,
quantity feed)
the workpiece will travel to
Operation speed
Speed
the specified transfer distance at the same speed,
where it will decelerate and
Interruption command
Start
the operation will stop.
Transfer distance

2-speed positioning with
speed reduction
Speed

Operation
speed(1)

Operation
speed(2)

Start Speed reduction Stop
command
command

input(1)

*6.

input(2)

Interrupt positioning instruction performs this operation.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

A - 17

Example
Connection

−

Start point

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Interrupt stop
(linear interpolation [Interrupt If an interrupt input turns ON,
stop])
during a linear interpolation
operation to the target posiIgnoring
remaining
tion (x, y) at a vector speed,
Target
distance
the speed will decelerate and
Y-axis
position
the positioning operation will
(x, y)
Interrupt input stop.

FX2N-1PG(-E)

Description

Common Items

Positioning operation
pattern

Built-in positioning function
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(main unit)
(Transistor output)
FX3U-2HSY-ADP(FX3U)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Comparison of Specifications

Common Items

3*8

The workpiece will travel to
the target position at the
specified vector speed (interpolation operation).

−

FX3U-20SSC-H

3*7

FX2N-20GM

FX2N-10PG

The operation will be performed at the operation
speed specified by the PLC.

FX2N-10GM

Description

FX2N-1PG(-E)

Positioning operation
pattern

Built-in positioning function
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(main unit)
(Transistor output)
FX3U-2HSY-ADP(FX3U)

3.2 Comparison of Operation Modes

−

3*8

3*9

3*10

Variable-speed operation
Speed

Start Speed Speed
change change

Stop

Linear interpolation
Target
position (x, y)

Y-axis
y

x
X-axis

Start point

Circular interpolation
Target position (x, y)

Radius: -r
CCW
Target
position
(x, y)
Start point
Radius: r
Solid line :cw Dotted line :ccw

Start
point

The workpiece will travel to
the specified target position
(x, y) along an arc at the
specified circumferential
speed.
The center coordinate or
radius can be specified.

−

Table operation
No. Position Speed
0

200

500

1000

2000

•••

A positioning control program
can be set with the table.

−

200
points,
maximum

100
points,
maximum

3
−

X-/Y-/XYaxis:
300
points,
maximum

Manual pulse generator
operation
Input pulse:
30 kHz or less
Phase
A
Manual pulse Phase
generator
B

Manual operation can be performed with the manual pulse
generator.

Servo amplifier
drive unit

−

30 kHz,
maximum

2 kHz,
maximum

100 kHz,
maximum

Magnification
Dividing ratio

*7.

Variable speed pulse output instruction is used to perform this operation.
Operations with acceleration/deceleration are supported in the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G
PLC.

*8.

Operates with acceleration/deceleration.

*9.

When interpolation instructions are consecutively set in the program, it will immediately shift to the
next operation. (continuous pass operation).

*10. When the interpolation operation is continuously set in the table operation, it will immediately shift to
the next operation. (Continuation pass function)

A - 18

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

A
Common Items

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers

Apx.
Example
Connection

User’s Manual [Positioning Control Edition]
B. Built-in Positioning Functions

Foreword
"B. Built-in Positioning Functions" describes the "positioning" functions incorporated in the MELSEC-F FX3G/
FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Also, store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always
forward it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

B-1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

Description of Manual (Built-in Positioning Function)
In this manual, the following formats are used for describing the built-in positioning functions.
Shows the title of the manual and the title
of the division.
This area shows the title of the manual and the title
of the division for the current page.
1st line: Shows the title of the manual.
2nd line: Shows the title of the division.

Shows the title of the chapter
and the title of the section.
This area shows the title of the
chapter and the title of the
section for the current page.

Indexes the title of
division.
The right side of each
page indexes the title
of the division for the
current page.

Shows the reference.
This area shows the
reference document
(the reference document is
shown next to " ").
If the reference is in the
"A. Common items"
division, only the chapter,
section, or subsection
number will be shown
next to " ".
If the reference is in another
division, the chapter,
section, or subsection
number will be shown
next to " " together with
the title of the division.

Shows the version number
of the compatible PLC.
Compatible
series
Shows the compatible
version numbers.
Ver. 2.20: Version
below 2.20
Ver.2.20 : Version 2.20
or later

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only

B-2

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.1 Features

A
Common Items

Outline

1.1

Features

System

Points and references

• If the general outputs of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC are used:
3 axes*1, maximum

... Number of controllable axes

Servo amplifier (drive unit)etc.
1-axis

2-axes

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
(transistor output)

3-axes

...

To check the PLC model,
refer to Section 1.3.
For a detailed description of

... the positioning instructions,

refer to Chapters 6 to 11.
For a detailed description of
the input/output specifications,
... refer to Section 2.4 and
Section 2.5.
... For examples of connection,

refer to the Appendix.

*1. 2 independent axes in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
• If FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX 3U PLC:
4 axes, maximum

... Number of controllable axes

Servo amplifier (drive unit)etc.
1-axis

2-axes

3-axes

4-axes

FX3U-2HSY
-ADP

FX3U PLC

...

To check the PLC model,
refer to Section 1.3.
For a detailed description of the

... positioning instructions, refer to

Chapters 6 to 11.

For a detailed description of the
2nd

1st

... input/output specifications, refer

to Section 2.4 and Section 2.5.
... For examples of connection,

refer to the Appendix.

B-3

Apx.
Example
Connection

1) The general outputs of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC (transistor output) can control up to 3 axes*1 for
positioning operations.
2) If one high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) is connected, the adapter can control up to 2
axes for the positioning operation. If two high-speed output special adapters are connected, the adapters
can control up to 4 axes for the positioning operation.
3) The FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC positioning instructions (applied instructions) are used for positioning control.
4) The general outputs of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC (transistor output) can output a pulse train of 100 kHz
(open collector system).
5) The FX3U-2HSY-ADP high-speed output special adapter can output a pulse train of 200 kHz (differential
line driver system).
6) The FX3U-2HSY-ADP high-speed output special adapter can switch the output method between "pulse
train + direction" method and "forward/reverse rotation pulse train" method.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This chapter describes a general outline of the positioning modules. Note that the general outputs of the
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC (transistor output) and FX3U-2HSY-ADP high-speed output special adapter are
needed for positioning control.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1.2

1 Outline
1.2 Setup Procedure for Positioning Control

Setup Procedure for Positioning Control

DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
3) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or
off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to
ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.

DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the
control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
Noise may cause malfunctions.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the built-in programming port, power connectors, I/O
connectors, communication connectors, or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation
after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

B-4

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1 Outline
1.2 Setup Procedure for Positioning Control

• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual
and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.

STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, expansion boards, and special adapters
- Input/output extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks

B-5

Apx.
Example
Connection

STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

• Make sure to properly wire the FX3U/FX3G Series main unit and FX0N/FX2N Series extension equipment in
accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.
• Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.22 and 0.25 N•m.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
• Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.

Common Items

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1 Outline
1.2 Setup Procedure for Positioning Control

Built-in positioning function
Refer to Chapter 1
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2
Specifications on incorporated
positioning functions

Outline of system
•Version numbers of compatible PLCs
•Version numbers of compatible programming
tools
•Assignment of input/output numbers

Specifications
•General specifications, power supply
specifications, performance specifications
•Input/output specifications
Refer to the manual of each motor.
Motor specifications

Refer to Division A
"Common Items".
System configuration and unit selection
Refer to Chapter 2
and Appendix.
Wiring
Refer to Chapter 4.
Setting of PLC side
Setting of servo amplifier parameters

Refer to Chapter 4.
Related devices
Refer to Chapter 5
Operation test
Refer to Chapters 6 to 11.
Programming

Motor
specifications
•Performance
specifications
•Motor capacity

System configuration
•Unit selection

Wiring
•Wiring of power supply, input, and
output lines
•Example of connection to servo amplifier
Setting of PLC and servo amplifier
•Selection of output method
(high-speed output special adapter)
•Setting of command pulse input method and
electronic gear (servo amplifier)
Related devices
•Maximum speed, zero return speed
•Acceleration time, deceleration time
Operation test
•Creation of program for operation test
•Motion check
(forward rotation, reverse rotation)
Programming
•Details on the positioning instructions

If the motor does not operate or does not
operate properly, refer to Chapter 13
"Troubleshooting."
Refer to Chapter 12.
Examples of practical programs

B-6

Examples of programs
(forward rotation, reverse rotation, zero return)
•Relay ladder program
•Step ladder program

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.3 Version Numbers of Compatible PLCs

Version Numbers of Compatible PLCs

1.3.1

Manufacturer's serial number check method

A
Common Items

1.3

1. Checking the nameplate
The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number
"SERIAL" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product.

Apx.

Example: FX3U-48MR/ES (manufacture's serial number: 930001)

Right side

Example
Connection

PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

MITSUBISHI

FX3U-48MR/ES

MODEL

100-240VAC 50/60Hz 40W
OUT:30VDC/240VAC 2A(COSφ=1)
930001

SERIAL

80M1 IND. CONT. EQ.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN

Control number
Month (Example: Mar.): (1 to 9 =January to September,
X= October, Y= November, Z= December)
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year

2. Checking the front of the product
The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number
"LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product.
The "LOT" indication is adopted for products manufactured at the following times.
Main unit

"LOT" indication adoption time

FX3U Series PLC

January 2009 and later

FX3UC Series PLC

January 2009 and later

FX3G Series PLC

October 2008 and later

Example: FX3U-48MR/ES

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT" indicated on
the front of the product.

Month (Example: Mar.): (1 to 9= January to September,
X= October, Y= November, Z= December)
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year

B-7

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1.3.2

1 Outline
1.3 Version Numbers of Compatible PLCs

Version check
The D8001 special data register contains information for determining the PLC version.

D8001

PLC type and
version

0
Version information (Example: Ver. 1.00)

PLC type Example: 24 = FX3U/FX3UC PLC
26 = FX3G PLC

1.3.3

Version upgrade history
Compatible PLC

FX3U PLC

Compatible version
number

Date (month and year)
of production

B-8

Equivalent to FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20
Functions specified as "Ver.2.20 or
later" in this manual are applicable.

Ver. 2.20 (initial product)
or later

After May 2005

Ver. 2.30 or later

After November 2005

Ver. 1.00 (initial product)
or later

After January 2004

Ver. 1.30 or later

After August 2004

• DVIT instruction function is added.
- Designation of interrupt input
signal

Ver. 2.20 or later

After May 2005

Functions specified as "Ver.2.20 or
later" in this manual are applicable.
• TBL instruction is added.
- GX Developer can set the
positions using parameters.
• PLSV instruction function is added.
- Acceleration/deceleration function
• DVIT instruction function is added.
- User interruption mode
• DSZR, ZRN instruction functions are
added.
- Designation of destination for
CLEAR signal to be output

Ver. 2.30 or later

After November 2005

Ver. 1.00 (initial product)
or later

After June 2008

FX3UC PLC

FX3G PLC

Remarks

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1.4 Version Numbers of Compatible Programming Tools

Version Numbers of Compatible Programming Tools
The built-in positioning functions depend on the version of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC. Select a compatible
version of GX Developer for programming.
→ For details on version numbers of compatible PLCs, refer to Section 1.3.
1) FX3U PLC
Model
(Software model)

*1.

Ver. 8.23Z or later
Ver. 8.29F or later

Remarks
•

Supports FX3U PLCs (Ver.2.20 or later).
Model selection: FX3U(C)*1

•

Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.2.30 or later).
Model selection: FX3U(C)

For Ver. 8.23Z or 8.24A of GX Developer, the model to be selected is FX3UC.

2) FX3UC PLC
Version number
of FX3UC PLC

Model
(Software model)

Ver.1.00 or later
Ver.1.30 or later
Ver.2.20 or later

Ver.8.13P or later
GX Developer
SWD5C-GPPW-J
SWD5C-GPPW-E

Ver.2.30 or later

*1.

Version number of
compatible GX Developer

Ver.8.18U or later
Ver.8.23Z or later
Ver. 8.29F or later

Remarks
•

Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.1.00 or later).
Model selection: FX3UC

•

Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.1.30 or later).
Model selection: FX3UC

•

Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.2.20 or later).
Model selection: FX3U(C)*1

•

Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.2.30 or later).
Model selection: FX3U(C)

For Ver. 8.23Z or 8.24A of GX Developer, the model to be selected is FX3UC.

3) FX3G PLC
Version number
of FX3G PLC

Model
(Software model)

Version number of
compatible GX Developer

Ver.1.00 or later

GX Developer
SWD5C-GPPW-J
SWD5C-GPPW-E

Ver.8.72A or later

Remarks
•

Supports FX3G PLCs (Ver.1.00 or later).
Model selection: FX3G

B-9

Apx.
Example
Connection

Ver.2.20 or later GX Developer
SWD5C-GPPW-J
Ver.2.30 or later SWD5C-GPPW-E

Version number of
compatible GX Developer

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Version
number of FX3U
PLC

Common Items

1.4

1 Outline

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

1.5

Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

1.5.1

Assignment of Input Numbers
Assign the input numbers of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC as follows:
Application

Input number

Remarks

Stop command

All input
points

Connect a line to any input.
If the line-connected input is turned on, turn off the positioning instruction signal
must be turned off.

Zero return
command

All input
points

Connect a line to any input.
If the line-connected input is turned on, the DSZR or ZRN instruction must be
turned on.

Near-point
signal
(DOG)

Connect a line to the input of the near-point signal (DOG) specified by DSZR or
ZRN instruction.
→ For details on the near-point signal of the DSZR instruction, refer to
Section 6.2.
→ For details on the near-point signal of the ZRN instruction, refer to
Section 6.3.
All input
points

Point:
• To use the DSZR instruction:
If X000 to X017*1 of the main unit are set for the near-point signal (DOG), the
near-point signal (DOG) will be monitored at 1ms intervals.
• To use the ZRN instruction:
If X000 to X007 of the main unit are set for the near-point signal (DOG), the PLC
interruption function will be used for processing of the near-point signal (DOG).

Zero-phase
Connect a line to the input (X000 - X007) specified for the zero-phase signal (this
X000 to X007
input is specified by DSZR instruction).
signal

B - 10

ABS read

All input
points

Connect a line if it is necessary to use the absolute position detection system.
Connect a line to the input specified by the ABS instruction.
Use 3 consecutive input points for this function.

JOG command

All input
points

Connect a line to any input.
If the line-connected input is turned on, the DRVI instruction for the jogging motion
must be turned on.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

1 Outline
1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

A
Input number

Remarks
The interrupt input depends on the pulse output destination specified by the DVIT
instruction*2 as shown in the following table. If the version number of the PLC is
1.30 or higher, the interrupt input can be specified.
interrupt input

Y000

X000

Y001

X001

Y002

X002

Y003

X000 to X007

X003

FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later
If the interrupt input specification function is used, the D8336
register (interrupt input specification register) can specify the
interrupt input number (X000 - X007) for each pulse output
destination.
→ For details on the interrupt input specification method, refer to
Subsection 4.3.7.
FX3U/FX3UC PLC*4 Ver. 2.20 or later
If the interrupt input specification function is used, the D8336
register (interrupt input specification register) can specify the
interrupt input number (X000 - X007) for each pulse output
destination, or the user interrupt input command can be
specified.
→ For details on the user interrupt input command, refer to
Subsection 4.3.7.
The user interrupt input command depends on the pulse output destination as
shown in the following table.
Pulse output destination

User interrupt input command

Y000

M8460

Y001

M8461

Y002

M8462

Y003*3

M8463

Connect a line to any input.
If the line-connected input is turned on, the forward limit relay must be turned on.
The forward limit relay depends on the pulse output destination as shown in the
following table.
Forward
rotation limit
(LSF)

All input
points

Pulse output destination

Forward limit relay

Y000

M8343

Y001

M8353

Y002

Y003

M8363
M8373

Connect a line to any input.
If the line-connected input is turned on, the reverse limit relay must be turned on.
The reverse limit relay depends on the pulse output destination as shown in the
following table:
Reverse rotation limit (LSR)

All input
points

Pulse output destination

Reverse limit relay

Y000

M8344

Y001

M8354

Y002*5

M8364

M8374

Y003

B - 11

Apx.
Example
Connection

Interrupt input

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Pulse output destination

Common Items

Application

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.5.2

1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

*1.

X000 to X007 for FX3U-16M, FX3UC-16M.
X000 to X007 for FX3G PLC (main unit).

*2.

Interrupt outputs are supported only in the FX3U and FX3UC PLC.

*3.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if 2 high-speed output special adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*4.

Ver.2.20 is assigned to the initial product of the FX3U PLC.

*5.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

Assignment of Output Numbers
1. FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series main unit (transistor output)
Application
Pulse train signal
(Pulse output
destination)
Direction signal
(Rotational
direction signal)

Output
number
Y000
Y001
Y002*1
All output
points*2

Remarks
Connect a line to the output (Y000 - Y002) specified for the pulse output
designation (this output is specified by the positioning instruction).
Connect a line to any output.
Connect a line to the output specified for the rotation direction signal (this signal is
specified by the positioning instruction).
Connect a line if it is necessary to use DSZR/ZRN instruction to output the CLEAR
signal.
The CLEAR signal output depends on the pulse output destination specified by
the DSZR/ZRN instruction. If the PLC version is later than the following number,
the CLEAR signal can be specified.
Pulse output destination

CLEAR signal

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Y002

CLEAR signal

All output
points*2

Y006

FX3U/FX3UC PLC (transistor output) Ver. 2.20 or later:
If the CLEAR signal device specification function is used, the
CLEAR signal device specification register can specify an
output for each pulse output destination.
→ For details on the CLEAR signal device specification method, refer to
Subsection 4.3.4.
The CLEAR signal device specification register depends on the pulse output
destination as shown in the following table:

B - 12

Pulse output destination

CLEAR signal device specification register

Y000

D8464

Y001

D8465

Y002

D8466

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Specify an output number for transistor output.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

Application

Y1/3+
Y1/3-

Y4/6+
Y4/6-

Y5/7+
Y5/7-

1st

Y000

Y001

Y004

Y005

Remarks

2nd

Y002

Connect a line to determine the pulse train signal or the forward
rotation pulse train for the 1st axis of each high-speed output
special adapter.
For the 1st adapter, specify Y000 as the pulse output destination
of the positioning instruction. For the 2nd adapter, specify Y002
as the pulse output destination of the positioning instruction.

Y003

Connect a line to determine the pulse train signal or the forward
rotation pulse train for the 2nd axis of each high-speed output
special adapter.
For the 1st adapter, specify Y001 as the pulse output destination
of the positioning instruction. For the 2nd adapter, specify Y003
as the pulse output destination of the positioning instruction.

Y006

Connect a line to determine the direction signal or the reverse
rotation pulse train for the 1st axis of each high-speed output
special adapter.
For the 1st adapter, specify Y004 as the rotation direction signal
of the positioning instruction. For the 2nd adapter, specify Y006
as the rotation direction signal output of the positioning
instruction.

Y007

Connect a line to determine the direction signal or the reverse
rotation pulse train for the 2nd axis of each high-speed output
special adapter.
For the 1st adapter, specify Y005 as the rotation direction signal
output of the positioning instruction. For the 2nd adapter, specify
Y007 as the rotation direction signal output of the positioning
instruction.
Connect a line if it is necessary to use the DSZR/ZRN instruction
to output the CLEAR signal.
Using the CLEAR signal device specification function, specify the
output number for the transistor output. In this case, do not
specify an output device if the device is already specified for
outputting the rotational direction signal.

→ For details on the CLEAR signal device specification
method, refer to Subsection 4.3.4.
The CLEAR signal device specification register depends on the
pulse output destination as shown in the following table:
CLEAR signal

Pulse output destination

CLEAR signal device
specification register

Y000

D8464

Y001

D8465

Y002

D8466

Y003

D8467

All output points *1

Point:
The CLEAR signal output that is initially set for the DSZR/ZRN
instruction is the same output as the direction signal (rotation
direction signal, reverse pulse train). Be sure to specify an
output number of another transistor output using the CLEAR
signal device specification function.

*1.

Specify an output number for transistor output.

B - 13

Apx.
Example
Connection

Direction signal/reverse
rotation pulse
train
(rotation
direction
signal)

Y0/2+
Y0/2-

Output number

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Pulse train signal/forward
rotation pulse
train
(pulse output
destination)

Terminal

Common Items

2. High-speed output special adapter

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.5.3

1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

Connection of High-Speed Output Special Adapter
1. When the FX3U-16MR/ES uses an instruction that needs the high-speed inputting operation,
the main unit should have enough input terminals. Before selecting the main unit, be sure
to check the number of input points needed for the operation.
2. Specify the rotational direction signal of the positioning instruction depending on the
setting of each pulse output destination as shown in the following table:
Pulse output destination

Rotation direction signal

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Y002

Y006

Y003

Y007

1st
2nd

3. To output the CLEAR signal using DSZR/ZRN instruction
The CLEAR signal output that is initially set for the DSZR/ZRN instruction is the same output as the direction
signal/reverse pulse train (rotation direction signal). Be sure to specify an output number of another transistor
output using the CLEAR signal device specification function.
→ For details on the CLEAR signal device specification method, refer to
Subsection 4.3.4.

4. If high-speed output special adapter is connected to the FX3U Series main unit, the output
numbers will be assigned in the same way as the main unit.
If an output number assigned to a high-speed output special adapter is turned on by the sequence program,
the corresponding output of the main unit will also be turned on. Do not connect a line to both output
terminals. Connect a line to one of the output terminals.
The outputs of the high-speed output special adapter and the main unit will be turned on as shown in the
following table:
Output operation
Unit

B - 14

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR,
DVIT,TBL,ZRN,PLSV,D
RVI,DRVA instruction.

PWM instruction

Other
instruction

While instruction is
FX3U Series main unit activated, relevant
of relay output type
output is ON. (LED is
also ON.)

Use of the PWM (FNC58) instruction is not
compatible with a relay type main unit.*2

Operated

FX3U Series main unit
of transistor output
Operated*1
type

Operated

High-speed output
special adapter

Operated
The main unit should use the transistor output
type.*2

Operated

*1.

The output frequency limit of the main unit transistor output is 100 kHz. When operating a load with a
pulse frequency exceeding 100 kHz, PLC failure may occur.

*2.

Furthermore, use of the PWM (FNC58) is not recommended with the relay type main unit and the
high-speed adapters due to chattering of the relay contacts.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

1 Outline

Built-in Positioning Functions

1.5 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers

A
Common Items

Block diagram
FX3U Series main unit
FX3U-2HSY
-ADP

Sequence program

FX3U-2HSY
-ADP
1st

Y000
Y001
Y004
Y005

Y000

FNC 158 K15000 K10000 Y001
DRVA

Y005

FNC 159 K10000 K10000 Y002
DRVA

Y006

FNC 159 K1000 K5000
DRVI

Y007

Y001 Y002 Y003

Y003

Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007

B - 15

Apx.
Example
Connection

Y002
Y003
Y006
Y007

Y004

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

2nd

FNC 158 K30000 K20000 Y000
DRVI

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

Specifications
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
3) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or
off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to
ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.

DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
• Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal
of your device.

TRANSPORTATION
PRECAUTIONS
• Before transporting the PLC, turn on the power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off.
If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted, the battery-backed data may be
unstable during transportation.
• The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general
specifications of the PLC main unit manual. Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC. After transportation,
verify the operations of the PLC.

B - 16

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

General Specifications

Item
Withstand voltage

2.2

500V AC, for 1 minute
5M Ω or more using 500V DC
insulation tester

Between output terminal of high-speed output
special adapter and grounding terminal of PLC.

Power Supply Specifications
For the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC power supply specifications, refer to the following manuals. The power supply
specifications of the high-speed output special adapter are shown in the following table.
→ For the FX3G PLC power supply specification, refer to the FX3G Hardware Edition.
→ For the FX3U PLC power supply specification, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ For the FX3UC PLC power supply specifications, refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.
Item
Output circuit drive
power supply
Adapter drive power
supply

Apx.
Example
Connection

Insulation resistance

Specifications

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

For the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC general specifications, refer to the following manuals. Note that the
high-speed output special adapter general specifications are the same as the PLC excluding the specifications
shown in the following table.
→ For the FX3G PLC general specifications, refer to the FX3G Hardware Edition.
→ For the FX3U PLC general specifications, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ For the FX3UC PLC general specifications, refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.

Common Items

2.1

2.1 General Specifications

Specifications
24V DC, 60 mA
The service power of the main unit is supplied internally.
5V DC, 30 mA
The adapter driver power is internally supplied from the 5V DC power supply unit of the
main unit.

B - 17

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.3

2.3 Performance Specifications

Performance Specifications
Model

Number of control axes
Interpolation

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC*1
(main unit, transistor output)

FX3U-2HSY-ADP*2

3 independent axes*4

2 independent axes
(Connect 2 adapters to the main unit to
control 4 axes independently.)

Pulse output system

Open collector system

Differential line driver system

Pulse output method

"Pulse train + direction" method

"Pulse train + direction" method
"Forward/reverse rotation pulse train"
method

Maximum frequency

100,000Hz

200,000Hz

Acceleration/
deceleration type

Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration

Unit

pulse

Positioning range

-999,999 to +999,999(pulse)

Program language

Sequence program

Position data
Connection of
pulse generator

1 point (set in sequence program)
manual

Detection of absolute
position
(Reads out the current
value of ABS.)

Others

ABS instruction

• Pulses can be output from the generalpurpose outputs (Y000, Y001, and
Y002) of the main unit.

• To be used when a servo amplifier with
a differential line receiver method is
connected.
• To be used when positioning control is
performed with a FX3U Series relay
output type main unit.
• Used in place of the general-purpose
outputs (Y000 to Y007)*3 of the main
unit.

*1.

For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink input/sink output type PLC.

*2.

Can only be connected to the FX3U PLC. Up to 2 adapters can be connected.

*3.

If 2 adapters are connected, Y000 to Y007 will be used. If only one adapter is connected, Y000,
Y001, Y004, and Y005 will be used. The relation between the output of the FX3U-2HSY-ADP and the
output of main unit is described in the following sections.
→ To use high-speed output special adapters, refer to Subsection 1.5.3 and Section 4.9 of "B. Built-in
Positioning Function".
*4.

B - 18

2 independent axes in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.4 Input Specifications

Input Specifications

2.4.1

FX3U Series main unit (24V DC Input)

Common Items

2.4

Item

24V DC input specifications

Input signal voltage

All inputs

Input signal current

Input ON
current
Input OFF
current

24V DC±10%

X000 to X005

3.9kΩ

X006,X007

3.3kΩ

Apx.
Example
Connection

Input impedance

Input sensitivity
current

X010 or later

4.3kΩ

X000 to X005

6mA/24V DC

X006,X007

7mA/24V DC

X010 or later

5mA/24V DC

X000 to X005

3.5 mA or more

X006,X007

4.5mA or more

X010 or later

3.5 mA or more

All inputs

1.5mA or less

Input response time

All inputs

Approx. 10 ms*1

Input signal type

All inputs

No-voltage contact input
NPN/PNP open collector transistor

Circuit insulation

All inputs

Indication of input motion

*1.

Photocoupler insulation
Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp.

If inputs X000 to X007 are assigned to the zero-phase signal of DSZR instruction or the interrupt input
of the DVIT the instruction, the input response time will be as shown in the following table.
Input

Input response time

X000 to X005

5µs

X006,X007

50µs

1. Internal input circuit
Sink input line connection
Main unit

Fuse

Source input line connection
Main unit
L

0V
S/S

Class-D
grounding

24V

0V
S/S

0V
24V

Input
impedance

Fuse

N
24V

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This section describes the input specifications of the FX3U Series main unit. Note that the simultaneous
turning-on rate is restricted for the input extension units and the main unit. For details on this restriction, refer
to the following manual:
→ Refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.

Class-D
grounding

Input
impedance

B - 19

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.4.2

2.4 Input Specifications

FX3UC Series main unit (24V DC Input)
This section describes the input specifications of the FX3UC Series main unit. Note that the simultaneous
turning-on rate is restricted for the input extension units and the main unit. For details on this restriction, refer
to the following manual:
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.
Item

24V DC input specifications

Input signal voltage

All inputs

Input impedance

Input signal current

Input ON
current

24V DC +20%, -15% / Ripple(p-p): 5 % or less

X000 to X005

3.9kΩ

X006,X007

3.3kΩ

X010 to X017

4.3kΩ

X000 to X005

6mA/24V DC

X006,X007

7mA/24V DC

X010 to X017

5mA/24V DC

X000 to X005

3.5 mA or more

X006,X007

4.5mA or more

X010 to X017

3.5mA or more

All inputs

1.5mA or less

Input response time

All inputs

Approx. 10 ms*1

Input signal type

All inputs

No-voltage contact input
NPN open collector transistor
PNP open collector transistor*2

Circuit insulation

All inputs

Photocoupler insulation

Input sensitivity
current

Input OFF
current

Indication of input motion

*1.

Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp*3

If inputs X000 to X007 are assigned to the zero-phase signal of the DSZR instruction or the interrupt
input of the DVIT instruction, the input response time will be as shown in the following table.
Input

Input response time

X000 to X005

5µs

X006, X007

50µs

*2.

PNP open collector transistors are supported only by the FX3UC-MT/DSS.

*3.

The FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) uses the display module for monitoring.

1. Internal input circuit

·Sink input type(FX3UC- MT/D, FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2))
Main unit

Fuse
24V DC

Class-D grounding
COM

X0
X1
Input impedance

B - 20

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.4 Input Specifications

A
·Source input type (FX3UC- MT/DSS)

Main unit

Fuse

24V DC

Common Items

·Sink input type(FX3UC- MT/DSS)

B
*
COM0

* Class-D grounding

Apx.
Example
Connection

COM0

Input impedance

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

X1
Input impedance

* Class-D grounding

B - 21

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.4.3

2.4 Input Specifications

FX3G Series main unit (24V DC Input)
This section describes the input specifications of the FX3G Series main unit. Note that the simultaneous
turning-on rate is restricted for the input extension units and the main unit. For details on this restriction, refer
to the following manual:
→ Refer to the FX3G Hardware Edition.
Item

24V DC input specifications

Input signal voltage

24V DC ±10%

All inputs
X000 to X007

3.3kΩ

X010 or more

4.3kΩ

X000 to X007

7mA/24V DC

X010 or more

5mA/24V DC

X000 to X007

4.5 mA or more

X010 or more

3.5mA or more

All inputs

1.5mA or less

Input response time

All inputs

Approx. 10 ms*1

Input signal type

All inputs

No-voltage contact input
NPN/PNP open collector transistor

Circuit insulation

All inputs

Photocoupler insulation

Input impedance
Input signal current

Input sensitivity
current

Input ON
current
Input OFF
current

Indication of input motion

*1.

Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp

If inputs X000 to X007 are assigned to the zero-phase signal of the DSZR instruction the input
response time will be as shown in the following table.
Input

Input response time

X000, X001, X003, X004

10µs

X002, X005 to X007

50µs

1. Internal input circuit
Sink input type

Source input type

Main unit

Fuse

Main unit

Fuse

Class-D
grounding

Input
impedance

B - 22

Input
impedance

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.5 Output Specifications

Output Specifications

2.5.1

FX3U Series main unit (Transistor Output)

Common Items

2.5

Item

Transistor output specifications

External voltage

All outputs

5 to 30V DC

Inductive load

All outputs

12W/24V DC

Open-circuit leakage current

All outputs

0.1 mA or less at 30V DC

ON voltage

All outputs

1.5V or less

OFF→ON
Response time
ON→OFF
Circuit insulation
Indication of output motion

Y000 to Y002

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y003 and more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA (at 24V DC)

Y000 to Y002

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y003 and more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA (at 24V DC)

All outputs

Photocoupler insulation

LED is lit when the photocoupler is driven.

Pulse output terminals Y000, Y001, and Y002 are high-speed response output terminals.
To use the positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the NPN open collector to 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
Item

Description

Operation voltage range

5 to 24V DC

Operation current range

10mA to 100mA

Output frequency

100 kHz or less

1. Sink internal output circuit
FX3U Series
main unit

Pulse train signal
Y000
COM1

Y004

Direction signal

COM2

Grounding*1

Servo amplifier
(Drive unit)

5 to 24V DC

*1.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

B - 23

Apx.
Example
Connection

Resistance load All outputs

The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value or less.
- 1 point output common:0.5A
- 4 points output common:0.8A
- 8 points output common:1.6A

Maximum load

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This section describes the transistor output specifications of the FX3U Series main unit. Please note that the
simultaneous turning-on rate is restricted for the output extension units and the main unit. For details on the
restriction, refer to the following manual.
For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink input/sink output type PLC.
→ Refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.5 Output Specifications

2. Source internal output circuit
FX3U Series
main unit

Pulse train signal
Y000
+V0
Direction signal
Y004
+V1

Grounding*1

Servo amplifier*2
(Drive unit)
5 to 24V DC

B - 24

*1.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

*2.

For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink output type FX3U Series main unit.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

FX3UC Series main unit (Transistor Output)

Item

Transistor output specifications

External voltage

5 to 30V DC

Y000 to Y003

0.3 A/point

Y004 or more

0.1A/1point

Y000 to Y003

7.2W/1point
(24V DC)

Y004 or more

2.4W/1point
(24V DC)

Open-circuit leakage current

All outputs

0.1 mA or less at 30V DC

ON voltage

All outputs

1.5V or less

Y000 to Y003

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y004 to Y017

0.2 ms or less at 100 mA (at 24V DC)

Y000 to Y002

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y003 or more

0.2 ms or less at 100 mA (at 24V DC)

All outputs

Photocoupler insulation

Resistance load
Maximum
load
Inductive load

FX3UC-32MT-LT
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2

Response
FX3UC-MT/D
time
FX3UC-MT/
DSS

OFF→ON
ON→OFF
OFF→ON
ON→OFF

Circuit insulation
Indication of output motion

*1.

The total load current of the common
items (16 points) should be 1.6 A or
less.
The total load of the common items
(16 points) should be 38.4 W or less at
24V DC.

LED is lit when the photocoupler is driven.*1

The FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) uses the display module for monitoring.

Description

Operation voltage range

5 to 24V DC

Operation current range

10mA to 100mA

Output frequency

100 kHz or less

1. Sink internal output circuit
5 to 24V DC

FX3UC- MT/D
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
Main unit

Pulse train signal

Servo amplifier
(Drive unit)

Y0
Direction signal

Y4
Grounding*2

COM1

*2.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

B - 25

Apx.
Example
Connection

All outputs

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This section describes the transistor output specifications of the FX3UC Series main unit. Note that the
simultaneous turning-on rate is restricted for the output extension units and the main unit. For details on this
restriction, refer to the following manual:
For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink input/sink output type PLC.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.

Common Items

2.5.2

2.5 Output Specifications

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.5 Output Specifications

2. Source internal output circuit
5 to 24V DC

FX3UC- MT/DSS
Main unit
Pulse train signal

Servo amplifier*2
(Drive unit)

Y0
Direction signal

Y4
Grounding*1

+V0

B - 26

*1.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

*2.

For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink output type FX3UC Series main unit .

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

FX3G Series main unit (Transistor Output)
This section describes the transistor output specifications of the FX3G Series main unit. Note that the
simultaneous turning-on rate is restricted for the output extension units and the main unit. For details on this
restriction, refer to the following manual:
→ Refer to the FX3G Hardware Edition.
Transistor output specifications

External voltage
Resistance load

All outputs

5 to 30V DC

All outputs

The total load current of resistance loads per common
terminal should be the following value or less.
- 1 point output common:0.5A
- 4 points output common:0.8A

All outputs

The total of inductive loads per common terminal
should be the following value or less.
- 1 point output common:12W/24V DC
- 4 points output common:19.2W/24V DC

Open-circuit leakage current

All outputs

0.1 mA or less at 30V DC

ON voltage

All outputs

1.5V or less

Y000, Y001

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y002 or more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA or more (at 24V DC)

Y000, Y001

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y002 or more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA or more (at 24V DC)

Y000 to Y002

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y003 or more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA or more (at 24V DC)

Y000 to Y002

5 µs or less at 10 mA or more (5 to 24V DC)

Y003 or more

0.2 ms or less at 200 mA or more (at 24V DC)

All outputs

Photocoupler insulation

Inductive load

14-point, 24-point
type
Response
time
40-point, 60-point
type
Circuit insulation

OFF→ON
ON→OFF
OFF→ON
ON→OFF

Indication of output motion

LED is lit when the photocoupler is driven.

Pulse output terminals Y000, Y001, and Y002*1 are high-speed response output terminals.
To use the positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the NPN open collector to 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
*1.

Y002 works as a high-speed response pulse output terminal only in 40-point and 60-point type main
units.
Item

Description

Operation voltage range

5 to 24V DC

Operation current range

10mA to 100mA

Output frequency

100 kHz or less

B - 27

Apx.
Example
Connection

Maximum
load

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Item

Common Items

2.5.3

2.5 Output Specifications

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.5 Output Specifications

1. Sink internal output circuit
FX3G Series
main unit

Pulse train signal
Y000
COM0

Y004

Direction signal

COM3

Servo amplifier
(Drive unit)

Grounding*1

5 to 24V DC

2. Source internal output circuit
FX3G Series
main unit

Pulse train signal
Y000
+V0
Direction signal
Y004
+V3
Grounding*1

Servo amplifier*2
(Drive unit)
5 to 24V DC

B - 28

*1.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

*2.

For MELSERVO Series amplifiers, use a sink output type FX3G Series main unit.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

High-Speed Output Special Adapter [FX3U-2HSY-ADP]
This section describes the output specifications of the high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP).
Item

High-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP)

Differential line driver system (equivalent to AM26C31)

Load current

25 mA or less

Maximum output frequency

200KHz

Insulation

Photocoupler and transformer insulate PLC from external lines of its outputs, and
transformer insulates each SG.

Cable length

10 m, maximum

Apx.
Example
Connection

1. Internal output circuit
•To connect to photocoupler:

Servo amplifier
(Drive unit)

Pulse train,
forward rotation pulse train
Y0/2+
Y0/2-

Y4/6+

Direction signal, reverse
rotation pulse train

Y4/6Grounding*1

SGA
SGA*2
•To connect to differential line receiver:

Equivalent to
AM26C31

Servo amplifier
(Drive unit)

Pulse train,
forward rotation pulse train
Y1/3+
Y1/3-

Y5/7+

Direction signal, reverse
rotation pulse train

Y5/7SGB
SGB*2

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Output system

High-speed output
special adapter
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
5V
Equivalent to
AM26C31

Common Items

2.5.4

2.5 Output Specifications

Grounding*1

*1.

To ground the unit, refer to the servo amplifier (drive unit) manual. If the grounding method is not
specified, carry out class-D grounding.

*2.

The line between the SGA and the SGB is insulated.

B - 29

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

2 Specifications

Built-in Positioning Functions

2.6

2.6 List of Functions

List of Functions
The instructions needed for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC built-in positioning functions are shown in the following
table:
Positioning instruction

Operation

Description

Refer to

If the DSZR/ZRN instruction turns ON,
mechanical zero return will be started at
the specified zero return speed. If the dog
sensor is turned on, the speed will be
reduced to the creep speed. If the zerophase signal is input, the operation will be
stopped, and the zero return will be
completed.
(If the ZRN instruction is used, the dog
sensor will be turned off to stop the
operation.)

Chapter
6.

If the ABS instruction turns ON, the
current motor address will be read out
from the servo amplifier.

Chapter
7.

If the DRVI/DRVA instruction turns ON,
the operation will be started at the
operation speed. When the workpiece
reaches the target position, the operation
will be stopped.

Chapter
8.

If the DVIT instruction turns ON, the
operation will be started at the operation
speed. If the interrupt input turns ON, the
workpiece will go the specified transfer
distance, before decelerating to stop.

Chapter
9.

Mechanical zero return

ZRN
instruction

zero return

Creep
speed

Zero return
speed

Speed

DSZR
instruction

zero return
with DOG
search
function

Zero point: ON DOG:ON
(Dog: OFF when ZRN
instruction is used)

Start

Absolute position detection system

ABS
instruction

Absolute
value detection system
(Reading of
current ABS
value)

Reads out the
current value.

1-speed positioning

DRVA
instruction

Relative
positioning
Absolute
positioning

Operation speed
Speed

DRVI
instruction

Transfer distance
Start

Target position

1-speed positioning with interruption

Interruption
positioning

Speed

Operation speed

DVIT
instruction

Transfer
distance
Start

Interrupt
input: ON

Variable speed operation

Start

Speed Speed Instruction:
change change OFF

Operation with
Acceleration/Deceleration*2
Operation speed
Speed

PLSV
instruction

Variable
positioning
(Variable
Speed Pulse
Output)

Speed

Operation without
Acceleration/Deceleration
Operation speed

Start

If the PLSV instruction turns ON,
operation will be started at the specified
speed. With an operation speed change,
the speed changes to the specified speed,
Chapter
and operation continues.
10.
At PLSV instruction OFF, the pulse output
stops.
With acceleration/deceleration operation,
the PLC accelerates and decelerates.

Speed Speed Instruction:
change change OFF

Others

TBL
instruction
*2

B - 30

Positioning
using batch
setting
method

No.
1

Position Speed Instruction
1000 2000
DRVI

2
3

20000
50

5000
1000

DRVA
DVIT

800

10000

DRVA

Preliminarily set the positioning points by
parameters. If the TBL instruction turns
ON, the workpiece will be transferred to
the specified point.

Chapter
11.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*2.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

2.6 List of Functions

A
Common Items

*1.

2 Specifications

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 31

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening Torques
This chapter describes how to connect the input/output lines and the terminal tightening torques.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in the manual of the PLC main unit.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn
out.
• Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in the manual of the PLC main unit.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn
out.
• Do not wire vacant terminals externally.
Doing so may damage the product.
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the FX3U/FX3G PLC
main unit with a wire 2 mm2 or thicker.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to the manual of the PLC main unit).
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.
Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to I/O connectors.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
• Connect input/output cables securely to their designated connectors.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
• Make sure to properly wire the FX3U/FX3G Series main unit and FX0N/FX2N Series extension equipment in
accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.
• Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.22 and 0.25 N•m.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
• Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.

B - 32

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

Terminal Board (M3, M3.5)
A terminal board is used for the FX3U, FX3G Series main unit, FX2N Series input/output extension unit
(excluding some types), and FX0N Series input/output extension block.

3.1.1

Terminal Screw Size

B
Product

Terminal screw

FX3U, FX3G Series main unit, FX2N Series input/output powered
extension unit, FX2N/FX0N Series input/output extension block

0.5 to 0.8N•m

M3.5

Termination
The size of each crimp-style terminal depends on the size of the terminal screw and the wiring method.
Refer to the following description to select a crimp-style terminal of optimum size.

1. FX3U, FX3G Series main unit,
FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, and FX0N Series input/output extension
block
• When one wire is connected to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

• When two wires are connected to one terminal

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more
3.2(0.13")

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

2. FX Series terminal block
• When one wire is connected to one terminal

3.7(0.15")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.8mm(0.27")
or less
3.7(0.15")
6.8mm(0.27")
or less

Apx.
Example
Connection

FX Series terminal block

Tightening torque

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The terminal screw size of each product is shown in the following table. For details on the crimp-style
terminals, refer to Subsection 3.1.2.

3.1.2

Common Items

3.1

3.1 Terminal Board (M3, M3.5)

Terminal

B - 33

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

3.2 European Terminal Board

• When two wires are connected to one terminal

3.7(0.15")
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.8mm(0.27")
or less

6.0mm(0.24")
or more
3.7(0.15")

6.8mm(0.27")
or less

3.2

Terminal

6.0mm(0.24")
or more

European Terminal Board
The European terminal board is used for the high-speed output special adapter and the FX2NC Series input/
output extension block.

3.2.1

Cable
Applicable cables and tightening torques
Wire size (stranded/
single wire)

3.2.2

Tightening
torque

Termination
• To connect a stranded cable, peel the sheath off the cable,
and then twist the core before connection.
• To connect a single-wire cable, just peel the sheath off the
cable before connection.

Single-wire

0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
(AWG22 to 20)

2-wires

0.3 mm2(AWG22)

Rod
terminal
with
insulation
sleeve

0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
(AWG22-20)
(Refer to the external
view of the rod terminal
shown in the following
figure.)

0.22 to
0.25 N•m

• Rod terminal with insulation sleeve
(recommended terminal)
AI 0.5-8WH: Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
• Caulking tool:
CRIMPFOX ZA 3: Manufactured by Phoenix Contact
(or CRIMPFOX UD 6: Manufactured by Phoenix Contact)

Termination of Cable End
Directly terminate the end of each stranded cable or single-wire cable without a tool, or use the rod terminal
with insulation sleeve for termination.
• Directly terminate the end of the stranded/single-wire cable:
- Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that "barbed wires"
cannot protrude.
- Do not solder-plate the end of the cable.

• Stranded wire/solid wire

• Terminate the cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve:
If the cable sheath is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable
into the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable
while referring to the external view.

• Bar terminal with insulating sleeve
Insulating sleeve Contact portion
(Crimp area)

Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact

B - 34

Model

Caulking tool

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX ZA 3
(or CRIMPFOX UD 6)

9mm
(0.36")

2.6mm
(0.11")

8mm
(0.32")
14mm(0.56")

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

Tool
• To tighten the terminals, use a purchased small-sized screwdriver whose tip is straight and is not widened
as shown in the right figure.

Phoenix Contact

Model

0.4mm
(0.02")

SZS 0.4×2.5

2.5mm
(0.1")

Connector
Connectors conforming to the requirements of the MIL C-83503 are used for the FX3UC Series main unit
along with some types of FX2NC Series input/output extension blocks.

3.3.1

Cable Connection To Input/Output Connector
Prepare the input/output cables while referring to the next Subsection.
Example : FX3UC-32MT/D Main unit
Input: X Output: Y

Input

Output

X10

Y10

X11

Y11

X12

Y12

X13

Y13

X14

Y14

X15

Y15

X16

Y16

X17

Y17

COM COM
*1

COM1 COM1
*1

*1: "•" means that the terminal is not used.

B - 35

Apx.
Example
Connection

3.3

With
straight tip

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Note:
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. Use the following recommended screwdriver or
an appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm).
Manufacturer

Common Items

3.2.3

3.3 Connector

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

3.3.2

3.3 Connector

Setup of Input/Output Connection Connector
1. Applicable connector (connector purchased at store)
Use a 20-pin (1-key) socket that conforms to the requirements of the MIL C-83503.
Preliminarily check that the peripheral parts, such as the connector cover, will not cause any interference.

2. Input/output cables (optional cables manufactured by our company)
Mitsubishi Electric can provide input/output cables already equipped with a connector.
Model

Length

FX-16E-500CAB-S

5m
(16’ 4")

FX-16E-150CAB

1.5m
(4’11")

FX-16E-300CAB

3m
(9’10")

FX-16E-500CAB

5m
(16’ 4")

FX-16E-150CAB-R

1.5m
(4’11")

FX-16E-300CAB-R

3m
(9’10")

FX-16E-500CAB-R

5m
(16’ 4")

FX-A32E-150CAB

1.5m
(4’11")

FX-A32E-300CAB

3m
(9’10")

FX-A32E-500CAB

5m
(16’ 4")

Description

Connector type

General-purpose input/output cable

• Single wire (Wire color: red)
• PLC side: A 20-pin connector

• Flat cables (with tube)
Cable for connection of FX Series
• A 20-pin connector at both ends
terminal block to input/output connector
For details on connection to the FX
Series terminal block, refer to the
following manuals:
→FX3G Hardware Edition
→FX3U Hardware Edition
• Round multicore cables
→FX3UC Hardware Edition
• A 20-pin connector at both ends

Cable for connection of A Series
A6TBXY36 connector/terminal board
conversion unit to input/output
connector type

• Flat cables (with tube)
• PLC side: Two 20-pin connectors
in 16-point units
• Terminal block side: A dedicated
connector
• One common terminal covers 32
input/output terminals

3. Input/output cable connectors prepared by purchaser (optional connectors manufactured
by Mitsubishi Electric)
The purchaser should prepare the cables and press-fitting tools.
Input/output connector model and number
of connectors included in one set
Description of parts
(Manufactured by Daiichi
Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.)

Our model

Crimp-style connector
FX2C-I/O-CON,for flat Set of
cable
10 parts FRC2-A020-30S

B - 36

Applicable cable
(recommended cable: UL-1061) and tool
Cable size

Crimping tool
(Manufactured by Daiichi
Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.)

AWG28(0.1 mm2) 357J-4674D main unit
1.27 pitch, 20 cores 357J-4664N attachment

FX2C-I/O-CON-S, for
non-stranded cable

5 sets

Housing HU-200S2-001
Crimp-style contact HU411S

AWG22(0.3mm2)

357J-5538

FX2C-I/O-CON-SA,
for non-stranded
cable

5 sets

Housing HU-200S2-001
Crimp-style contact HU411SA

AWG20(0.5mm2)

357J-13963

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

3 Connection of Input/Output Lines and Tightening

Built-in Positioning Functions

3.3 Connector

Connectors manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd. (shown in 3) and connectors manufactured by
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. (shown in following table)
Connector model
AXW1204A

Contact

AXW7221

Semi-cover

AXW62001A

Crimping tool

AWG22(0.3mm2)
AWG24(0.2mm2)

AXY52000

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Housing

Applicable cable
(recommended cable: UL-1061)

Common Items

4. Connector already confirmed as applicable (sold at store)

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 37

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.1 List of Related Devices

Before Programming
This chapter describes several items that should be known before programming. They are:
• Operation of related devices, such as output pulse frequency, operation command flag, current value, and
operation monitor flag.
• Items to be set on the PLC side
• Items to be set on the servo amplifier (drive unit) side
• Items to be observed in programming

4.1

List of Related Devices
→ For details on related devices, refer to Section 4.2 to Section 4.4.

4.1.1

Special Auxiliary Relays
The following table shows the related special auxiliary relays. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
→ For details on the PLSY (FNC 57), PWM (FNC 58), and PLSR (FNC 59) instructions, refer to the
programming manual.
Device number
Y000

Y002*6

Function

Y003*1

Attribute

Corresponding
instructions

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete"
flag

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR,
DVIT,ZRN,PLSV, Subsection
Read only
DRVI,DRVA
4.4.2
and so on.

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal
end" flag

Read only

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR,
Subsection
DVIT,ZRN,PLSV,
4.4.2
DRVI,DRVA

M8338*2

Acceleration/deceleration
Operation*3

Drivable

PLSV

Subsection
4.3.9

M8336*4

Interrupt input specification function
enable*3

Drivable

DVIT

Subsection
4.3.7

M8340 M8350 M8360 M8370

"Pulse output monitor" flag
(BUSY/READY)

M8341 M8351 M8361 M8371

CLEAR signal output function
enable*3

Read only

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR,
Subsection
DVIT,ZRN,PLSV,
4.4.3
DRVI,DRVA

Drivable

DSZR,ZRN

Subsection
4.3.4

M8342 M8352 M8362 M8372 Zero return direction specification*3

Drivable

DSZR

Subsection
4.3.3

M8343 M8353 M8363 M8373 Forward limit

Drivable

M8344 M8354 M8364 M8374 Reverse limit

Drivable

M8345 M8355 M8365 M8375 DOG signal logic reverse*3

Drivable

DSZR

Subsection
4.3.5

M8346 M8356 M8366 M8376 Zero point signal logic reverse*3

Drivable

DSZR

Subsection
4.3.6

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
*6.
*7.

B - 38

Y001

Subsection

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR, 4.3.1
DVIT,ZRN,PLSV,
Subsection
DRVI,DRVA

4.3.1

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the
FX3U PLC.
Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.
Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later.
For the user interrupt input command, the logical NOT function will not be activated.
Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is connected.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.1 List of Related Devices

A
M8347 M8357 M8367 M8377 Interrupt signal logic reverse*3,*5

Drivable

DVIT

Subsection
4.3.8

M8348 M8358 M8368 M8378 Positioning instruction activation

Read only

PLSY,PWM,PLSR,
Subsection
DSZR,DVIT,ZRN,
4.4.4
PLSV,DRVI,DRVA

M8349 M8359 M8369 M8379 Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

PLSY,PLSR,DSZR,
Subsection
DVIT,ZRN,PLSV,
4.3.2
DRVI,DRVA

M8460*7 M8461*7 M8462*7 M8463*7 User interrupt input command*3

Drivable

DVIT

Subsection
4.3.7

Drivable

DSZR,ZRN

Subsection
4.3.4

Y001

Y002*6 Y003*1

M8464*2 M8465*2 M8466*2 M8467*2
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
*6.
*7.

Function

CLEAR signal device specification
function enable*3

B - 39

Apx.
Example
Connection

Refer to

Y000

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Attribute

Corresponding
instructions

Common Items

Device number

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.1.2

4.1 List of Related Devices

Special Data Registers
The following table shows the related special data registers. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000

Function

Data
length

Initial
value

Corresponding
instructions

Refer to

interrupt input
specification

16-bit

DVIT

Subsection
4.3.7

Loworder Current value
register
High- [PLS]
order

32-bit

DSZR,DVIT,
ZRN,PLSV,
DRVI,DRVA

Subsection
4.4.1

16-bit

DSZR,DVIT,
ZRN,PLSV,
DRVI,DRVA

Subsection
4.2.6

32-bit

100,000

DSZR,DVIT,
ZRN,PLSV,
DRVI,DRVA

Subsection
4.2.5

16-bit

1000

DSZR

Subsection
4.2.4

LowLowLowD8376
D8366
order Zero return
order
order
speed
High- [Hz]
HighHighD8377
D8367
order
order
order

32-bit

50,000

DSZR

Subsection
4.2.3

Y002*5

Y001

Y003*1

D8336*2
LowD8350
order

LowLowD8370
D8360
order
order

HighD8351
D8341
order

HighHighD8371
D8361
order
order

D8340

D8342
D8343

D8352

LowD8353
order

HighD8354
D8344
order
D8345
D8346

HighD8357
D8347
order

B - 40

D8372

Bias speed
[Hz]

LowLowLowD8373
D8363
order Maximum
order
order
speed
High- [Hz]
HighHighD8374
D8364
order
order
order

D8355

LowD8356
order

D8362

D8365

D8375

Creep speed
[Hz]

DSZR,DVIT,

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration
time
[ms]

16-bit

100

ZRN,PLSV*3,
DRVI,DRVA

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration
time
[ms]

16-bit

100

ZRN,PLSV*3,
DRVI,DRVA

D8464*4

D8465*4

D8466*4

D8467*4

CLEAR
signal device
specification

16-bit

DSZR,DVIT,

DSZR,ZRN

Subsection
4.2.7
Subsection
4.2.8
Subsection
4.3.4

*1.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the
FX3U PLC.

*2.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later.
However, the user interrupt input command can be specified only if the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later is used.

*3.

This instruction is valid only during acceleration/deceleration supported in the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and
FX3G PLC.

*4.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

*5.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is connected.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds
Specify the output pulse frequency using the operand of each instruction or the related device to determine
the output pulse frequency, zero return speed, or creep speed.

4.2.1

Setting of Various Items Regarding Instructions and Speeds

Actual
deceleration time

Actual
acceleration time

Number of S1
output pulses

Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz
Acceleration
time

Current
position

Bias speed
Deceleration
time

Initial value: 100 ms

Target
position

Initial value: 100 ms

2. Variable speed Pulse Output (PLSV) instruction
For the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction, it is necessary to specify the maximum speed, bias
speed, acceleration time, and deceleration time using the related devices in addition to the output pulse
frequency specified by the operand of the instruction. However, note that the acceleration time and the
deceleration time are only valid during acceleration/deceleration (M8338 = ON).
→ For operation of PLSV instruction, refer to Chapter 10.
→ For details on each setting item, refer to Subsection 4.2.2 , and Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection
4.2.8.
1) When acceleration/deceleration is being performed (M8338 = ON)
Maximum speed
Initial value: 100,000 Hz

Actual
acceleration time

Actual
deceleration time

Output pulse
frequency S

Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz
Current
position

Bias speed
Acceleration
time
Initial value: 100 ms

Deceleration
time
Initial value: 100 ms

2) When acceleration/deceleration is not performed (M8338 = OFF)
Maximum speed
Initial value: 100,000 Hz
If the frequency value is
less than the bias speed
value, the frequency will
not be output.
Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz

Output pulse
frequency S

Bias speed

B - 41

Apx.
Example
Connection

For these instructions, it is necessary to specify the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, and
deceleration time using the related devices in addition to the output pulse frequency specified by the operand
of the instruction.
→ For operation of DVIT instruction, refer to Chapter 9.
→ For operation of DRVI or DRVA instruction, refer to Chapter 8.
→ For details on each setting item, refer to Subsection 4.2.2 , and Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1. Interrupt Positioning (DVIT) instruction, drive to increment (DRVI) instruction, and drive to
absolute (DRVA) instruction

Maximum speed
Initial value: 100,000 Hz
Output pulse frequency S2

Common Items

4.2

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

3. Zero return instruction with DOG search function (DSZR)
For this instruction, it is necessary to specify the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, deceleration
time, zero return speed, and creep speed using the related devices.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For details on each setting item, refer to Subsection 4.2.3 to Subsection 4.2.8.
Acceleration time

Deceleration time
Initial value:
100 ms

Initial value:
100 ms

Maximum speed
Initial value:
100,000 Hz

Zero return speed
Initial value: 50,000 Hz
Current value register = "0"
Creep speed
Initial value:
1,000 Hz

Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz
DOG

Rear end

Zero-phase signal
(X000 - X007)

Front end

Current position

1 ms or less

CLEAR signal

20 ms + 1 scan time (ms)

4. Zero return (ZRN) instruction
For this instruction, it is necessary to specify the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, and
deceleration time using the related devices in addition to the zero return speed and the creep speed specified
by the operand of the instruction.
→ For operation of ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.1.
→ For details on each setting item, refer to Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8.
Deceleration time

Acceleration time

Initial value:
100 ms

Maximum speed
Initial value:
100,000 Hz

Zero return speed
S1•

Creep speed S2•

Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz
DOG
CLEAR signal

Rear end

Current position
Front end

1 ms or less
20 ms + 1 scan time (ms)

B - 42

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Setting of Output Pulse Frequency (DVIT, PLSV, DRVI, and DRVA Instructions)

Apx.

Setting range
Instruction Operand 16-bit operation 32-bit operation

Instruction format

Example
Connection

(Hz)

DVIT
instruction*3

10 to 32767

10 to 200,000*1

PLSV
instruction

-32768 to -1,
+1 to 32767

-200,000*2 to -1,
+1 to 200,000*1

DRVI
instruction

10 to 32767

10 to 200,000*1

DRVA
instruction

10 to 32767

10 to 200,000*1

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Set the output pulse frequency using the operand of each instruction. In this case, the setting range depends
on the instruction (see the following table).
However, even in the setting range of each instruction, if the set value of the output pulse frequency is more
than the maximum speed value, the operation will be performed at the maximum speed. If the set value of
the output pulse frequency is less than the bias speed value, the operation will be performed at the bias
speed.
→ For operation of DVIT instruction, refer to Chapter 9.
→ For operation of PLSV instruction, refer to Chapter 10.
→ For operation of DRVI or DRVA instruction, refer to Chapter 8.

A
Common Items

4.2.2

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

PLSV

S•

D1•

D2•

DRVI

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

DRVA

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

DVIT

*1.

If FX3U-2HSY-ADP is not used, note that the frequency value cannot be more than 100,000 Hz.

*2.

If FX3U-2HSY-ADP is not used, note that the frequency value cannot be less than -100,000 Hz.

*3.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Caution:
• To use the main unit (transistor output), set the output pulse frequency (absolute value) to 100,000 Hz or less.
If more than 100,000 Hz is output from the transistor output of the main unit to perform operation, it may cause PLC
failure.
• Set the output pulse frequency so that the output pulse frequency value is less than the maximum frequency value
of the servo amplifier (driver unit).

B - 43

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.2.3

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

Setting of Zero Return Speed (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
Use the related device or the operand of the instruction to set the zero return speed.
The zero return speed setting range is shown in the following table.
Be sure to set the zero return speed so that the relation with the other speeds can be "bias speed ≤ zero
return speed ≤ maximum speed". If the set value of the zero return speed is more than the maximum speed
value, operation will be performed at the maximum speed.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For operation of ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.3.
Operand or
related
device

Instruction

DSZR
instruction

D1 =Y000

D8347,D8346

D1 =Y001

D8357,D8356

D1 =Y002

D8367,D8366

Setting range
16-bit
32-bit
operation operation
(Hz)
(Hz)

10 to 200,000*1
Initial value: 50000

Instruction format

DSZR

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

ZRN

S1•

S2•

S3•

D•

D1 =Y003*3 D8377,D8376

ZRN instruction

10 to
32767

10 to
200,000*1

*1.

If FX3U-2HSY-ADP is not used, note that this value cannot be more than 100,000 Hz.

*2.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*3.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Caution:
• When using the transistor outputs of the main unit, set the pulse frequency for the zero return speed to less than
100 kHz.
If a pulse higher than 100 kHz is output from a transistor output of the main unit to perform an operation, PLC failure
may occur.
• Set the zero return speed so that the set value of the zero return speed is less than the maximum frequency value
of the servo amplifier (driver unit).

B - 44

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Setting of Creep Speed (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Setting range
Operand or
16-bit
32-bit
related
operation operation
device

Instruction

(Hz)

=Y000

=Y001

4.2.5

Apx.

(Hz)

D8345
D8355

=Y002

D8365

=Y003*3

D8375

ZRN instruction

Instruction format

10 to 32767
Initial value: 1000

DSZR

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

10 to 32767

ZRN

S1•

S2•

S3•

D•

*1.

If the maximum speed is set to less than 32767 Hz, note that this value (32767 Hz) will automatically
be changed to the maximum speed.

*2.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*3.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Setting of Maximum Speed
Set the maximum speed to determine the upper limit value for the output pulse frequency and the zero return
speed.
Use the devices shown in the following table to determine the maximum speed for each pulse output
destination device.
Pulse output
destination device

Maximum
speed

Y000

D8344,D8343

Y001

D8354,D8353

Y002*1

D8364,D8363

Y003*2

D8374,D8373

Setting range
Initial value

Transistor output of main
unit

High-speed output special
adapter

10 to 100,000 Hz:
If the value is set to 9 Hz or
100,000Hz
less, the maximum speed will
be automatically set to 10 Hz.

10 to 200,000 Hz:
If the value is set to 9 Hz or
less, the maximum speed will
be automatically set to 10 Hz.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

B - 45

Example
Connection

DSZR
instruction

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Use the related device or the operand of the instruction to set the creep speed. The creep speed setting
range is shown in the following table.
Be sure to set the creep speed so that the relation with the other speeds is "bias speed ≤ creep speed ≤
32767 Hz*1".
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For operation of ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.3.

Common Items

4.2.4

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.2.6

4 Before Programming
4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

Setting of Bias Speed
To control the stepping motor using each instruction, set the bias speed considering the resonance range of
the stepping motor and the automatic start frequency.
Use the devices shown in the following table to determine the bias speed for each pulse output destination
device.
Pulse output
destination device

4.2.7

Bias speed

Y000

D8342

Y001

D8352

Y002*1

D8362

Y003*2

D8372

Initial value

Setting range

0Hz

1/10 or less of maximum speed:
If the value is set to more than 1/10 of the maximum speed,
the bias speed will be automatically set to 1/10 of the
maximum speed.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Setting of Acceleration Time
Set the time required for acceleration from the bias speed to the maximum speed.
If the output pulse frequency is less than the maximum speed, the actual acceleration time will be shorter than
the set acceleration time.
If the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction is used, the set acceleration time is only valid during
acceleration/deceleration (M8338 = ON)*3.
Use the devices shown in the following table to determine the acceleration time for each pulse output
destination device.
Pulse output
destination device

B - 46

Acceleration
Time

Y000

D8348

Y001

D8358

Y002*1

D8368

Y003*2

D8378

Initial value

Setting range

100ms

50 to 5,000 ms:
If the value is set to 49 ms or less, the acceleration time will
be automatically set to 50 ms. If the value is set to 5,001 ms
or more, the acceleration time will be automatically set to
5,000 ms.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.2 Setting of Various Items Regarding Speeds

Setting of Deceleration Time

Deceleration
Time

Y000

D8349

Y001

D8359

Y002

D8369

Y003*2

D8379

Initial value

Setting range

100ms

50 to 5,000 ms:
If the value is set to 49 ms or less, the deceleration time will
be automatically set to 50 ms. If the value is set to 5,001 ms
or more, the deceleration time will be automatically set to
5,000 ms.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

B - 47

Apx.
Example
Connection

Pulse output
destination device

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Set the time required for deceleration from the maximum speed to the bias speed.
If the output pulse frequency is less than the maximum speed, the actual deceleration time will be shorter
than the set deceleration time.
If the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction is used, the set deceleration time is only valid during
acceleration/deceleration (M8338 = ON)*3.
Use the devices shown in the following table to determine the deceleration time for each pulse output
destination device.

Common Items

4.2.8

4 Before Programming

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

4.3

Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

4.3.1

Forward Rotation Limit and Reverse Rotation Limit
When using the servo motor, the forward rotation limit and the reverse rotation limit can be set for the servo
amplifier.
To use the DOG search function for zero return, or to set the forward rotation limit or the reverse rotation limit
for operations other than zero return using the PLC, set the forward rotation limit 1 (LSF) and reverse rotation
limit 1 (LSR) for the PLC so that these limit switches can be activated before the forward rotation limit 2 or
reverse rotation limit 2 of the servo amplifier.
As shown in the following figure, interlock the forward rotation limit 1 (LSF) with the forward limit relay, and the
reverse rotation limit 1 (LSR) with the reverse limit relay. If the forward limit relay or the reverse limit relay turns
ON, the motor will perform operation depending on the output instruction as shown in the following table.
Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

Forward rotation limit 1
M8343

Forward limit relay for Y000

M8344

Reverse limit relay for Y000

Reverse rotation limit 1

Use the relays shown in the following table to determine the forward rotation limit and the reverse rotation limit
for each pulse output destination device (Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003).
Corresponding instruction and stop

Pulse output
destination
device

Forward limit
relay

Reverse limit
relay

Y000

M8343

M8344

Y001

M8353

M8354

Y002*1

M8363

M8364

M8373

M8374

Y003

PLSV instruction
(M8338*3 =OFF)
If the corresponding rotation
limit relay is turned on, the
pulse output (operation) will
immediately stop.

DSZR, DVIT*4, ZRN,
PLSV(M8338*3 =ON), DRVI,
and DRVA instructions
If the corresponding rotation
limit relay is turned on, the
speed will decelerate, and the
operation will stop.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

M8338 is supported in the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC. If an FX3UC PLC is used
and its version is below Ver.2.20, the PLSV instruction will perform operation in the M8338 = OFF
mode (will perform operation without acceleration/deceleration).

*4.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Note:
If the forward rotation limit (LSF) and the reverse rotation limit (LSR) cannot be set, observe the following
items:
• Even if forward rotation limit 2 or reverse rotation limit 2 turns ON and the servo motor is automatically
stopped, the positioning instruction currently being activated cannot recognize the motor being stopped.
Therefore, pulses will be continuously output until the instruction is deactivated.
• The DOG search function of the DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function)
cannot be used.

B - 48

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

Immediate Stop of Pulse Output (Pulse Output Stop Command Relay)

Pulse output stop
command relay

Y000

M8349

Y001

M8359

Y002*1

M8369

Y003*2

M8379

Operation
During pulse outputting operation, if the pulse output stop
command relay of the corresponding pulse output
destination device is turned on, the pulse outputting
operation will immediately stop.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Note:
Use these relays only if immediate stop is absolutely needed to avoid dangers. Since the motor is
immediately stopped, use of these relays may damage the system. For normal STOP operation (decelerate
to stop), use the "instruction OFF" function or "forward/reverse limit relay."
However, note that if the PLSV instruction is used together with the "instruction OFF" function or the "forward/
reverse limit relay" in the M8338 = OFF mode (operation without acceleration/deceleration), operation will
immediately stop.

4.3.3

Designation of Zero Return Direction (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
Use the DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function) or ZRN instruction (zero return
instruction) to specify the zero return direction*1. The zero return direction depends on the instruction.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For operation of ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.3.
Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation

*1.

Forward rotation

If the DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function) is used, zero return will be
performed in the direction of the first operation.

1. Zero return instruction with DOG search function (DSZR instruction)
Turn on or off the zero return direction specification relay shown in the following table to specify the zero
return direction.
Pulse output
destination device

Zero return direction
specification relay

Y000

M8342

Y001

M8352

Y002*1

M8362

M8372

Y003

Description of setting
To perform zero return in the forward
rotation direction:Turn on the relay.
To perform zero return in the reverse
rotation direction:Turn off the relay.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

B - 49

Apx.
Example
Connection

Pulse output destination
device

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

During the execution of a positioning instruction, if the pulse output stop command relay is turned on, the
pulses being output will immediately stop.
To output pulses again, turn off the pulse output stop command relay, deactivate (turn off) the positioning
instruction, and then activate the instruction again (turn it on again).
The following table shows the pulse output stop command relay of each pulse output destination device.

Common Items

4.3.2

4 Before Programming

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

2. Zero return instruction (ZRN instruction)
Zero return will be performed in the reverse rotation direction only.
(During zero return, the value indicated by the current value register will be decreased.)
To perform zero return in the forward rotation direction using the ZRN instruction (zero return instruction):

To perform zero return in the forward rotation direction, create a program to control the output (Y) relay set as
a "rotational direction signal" as follows:
→ For details on programming, refer to Section 4.7.
→ To use the main unit (transistor output), refer to Section 4.8.
→ To use a high-speed output special adapter, refer to Section 4.9.
1) Turn on Y (rotational direction signal).
2) Refresh Y output using the REF (FNC50) instruction.
3) Execute the ZRN instruction (zero return instruction).
4) Using the execution completion flag (M8029) of the ZRN instruction (zero return instruction), reset
Y (rotational direction signal).
Example program:
The following program uses Y004 as the rotational direction signal for Y000.
Command
input

RST

M10

RST

M11

SET

Y004

Y000

b) Refreshes Y000 to Y007.

S3•

Y000

c) Executes ZRN instruction.

RST

Y004

d) Resets the rotational direction
signal (Y004) using the instruction
execution complete flag.

SET

M10

Origin data reading completion flag

RST

Y004

Resets the rotational direction signal
(Y004) using the instruction
execution abnormal end flag.

SET

M11

Abnormal end of zero return

M8340
Y000 output
pulse monitor

FNC 50
REFP
FNC156
DZRN
M8029

M8329

B - 50

S1•

S2•

a) Turns on (sets) Y004 as the
rotational direction signal of Y000
(pulse output destination).

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

CLEAR Signal Output (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

1. If it is not necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification function, or if an FX3UC PLC
below Ver. 2.20 is used:
Status of "CLEAR
signal output
function enable"
relay

Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification
function enable" relay*3

CLEAR signal device
number

Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=OFF

Y004

Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=OFF

Y005

M8361=ON

M8466=OFF

Y006

M8371=ON

M8467=OFF

Y007

Y002
Y003

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to use the "CLEAR signal device specification
function enable" relay.

2. If it is necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification
function:
Turn on "CLEAR signal device specification function enable" relay to
specify the CLEAR signal output device (output Y) for the pulse output destination device using the CLEAR
signal device specification register.
Pulse output
Status of "CLEAR
destination signal output function
device
enable" relay

Apx.
Example
Connection

Pulse output
destination
device

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function) and ZRN instruction (zero return
instruction) can stop the workpiece at the origin, and can output the CLEAR signal.
If it is necessary to output the CLEAR signal after zero return, turn on the "CLEAR signal output function
enable" relay. The following table shows the "CLEAR signal output function enable" relay of each pulse
output destination device (Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003).
Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to specify the CLEAR signal output device.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For operation of ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.3.

Common Items

4.3.4

4 Before Programming

CLEAR signal device number
Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification
CLEAR signal device Initial value (CLEAR
function enable" relay specification register
signal device)

Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=ON

D8464

Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=ON

D8465

Y002

M8361=ON

M8466=ON

D8466

Y003*2

M8371=ON

M8467=ON

D8467

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.
→ For the CLEAR signal device specification method, refer to the next page.

If it is necessary to use a high-speed output special adapter:
The output devices initially set for the CLEAR signal of the DSZR/ZRN instruction are the same output
devices as the "direction signal / reverse pulse train (rotation direction signals)" of the high-speed output
special adapters. Be sure to specify output numbers of other transistor outputs using the CLEAR signal
device specification function.

B - 51

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

CLEAR signal device specification method:
1) Write the CLEAR signal output (Y) device number in the "CLEAR signal device specification" register with
a hexadecimal number (expressed in octal numbers).
e.g. setting H0010 means Y010. When setting H0008, an operation error occurs because Y008 does not
exist.
2) Turn on the "CLEAR signal output function enable" relay and "CLEAR signal device specification function
enable" relay to specify the CLEAR signal device.
3) Execute the DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function) or ZRN instruction (zero
return instruction).
Example program:
The following figure shows a program that can specify Y010 as the CLEAR signal output device for Y000
(pulse output destination device):
M8000

FNC 12
MOVP

RUN
monitor

4.3.5

H0010

D8464

Specifies the Y010 as the CLEAR signal output device for
Y000 (pulse output destination device).

M8464

Turns on "CLEAR signal device specification function enable"
relay for Y000 (pulse output destination device).

M8341

Turns on the "CLEAR signal output function enable" relay.

Change in Logic of Near-Point (DOG) Signal (DSZR Instruction)
Turn on or off the "DOG signal logic reverse" relay to specify the logic of the near-point (DOG) signal of the
DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function). Use the operand ( S1 ) of the
instruction to specify the near-point (DOG) signal.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
Pulse output
destination device

"DOG signal logic
reverse" relay

Y000

M8345

Y001

M8355

Y002*1

M8365

M8375

Y003

4.3.6

Description of setting
OFF:
ON:

Positive logic (Turning on the input will turn on the nearpoint signal.)
Negative logic (Turning off the input will turn on the nearpoint signal.)

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Change in Logic of Zero-Phase Signal (DSZR Instruction)
Turn on or off the "Zero point signal logic reverse" relay to specify the logic of the zero-phase signal of the
DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with dog search function). Use the operand ( S2 ) of the
instruction to specify the zero-phase signal.
→ For operation of DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.

B - 52

Pulse output
destination device

"Zero point signal
logic reverse" relay

Y000

M8346

Y001

M8356

Y002*1

M8366

Y003*2

M8376

Description of setting
OFF:
ON:

Positive logic (Turning on the input will turn on the zerophase signal.)
Negative logic (Turning off the input will turn on the zerophase signal.)

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Designation of Interrupt Input Signal for DVIT Instruction

Interrupt input signal
Pulse output
destination
device

If it is not necessary to use the
interrupt input specification function If it is necessary to use the interrupt input specification
function (M8336 = ON)
(M8336 = OFF), or if an FX3UC PLC
below Ver. 1.30 is used

*1.

X000

Y001

X001

Y002

X002

Y003*1

X003

Interrupt input for Y000
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y001
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y002
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y003
(pulse output destination device)

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Designation of interrupt input using M8336 interrupt input
specification function:
1) Turn on M8336.
2) Set the interrupt input number (X000 to X007) in D8336, or
specify the user interrupt input command*1.
→ For specifying the settings, refer to the following description.

D8336=H{ { { {
Interrupt input for Y000
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y001
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y002
(pulse output destination device)
Interrupt input for Y003
(pulse output destination device)

Setting value

Description of setting
Specifies X001 for the interrupt input signal.

Specifies X000 for the interrupt input signal.

1
~

Specifies X007 for the interrupt input signal.
Specifies the user interrupt input command*1 for the interrupt input signal.

8*1

9 to E*3
F

Pulse output destination device

User interrupt input command

Y000

M8460

Y001

M8461

Y002

M8462

Y003*2

M8463

Do not specify these values.
Set "F" for a pulse output destination device if the device is not used for the interrupt
positioning (DVIT) instruction.

B - 53

Apx.
Example
Connection

Y000

D8336=H{ { { {

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The interrupt input signal of the interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction depends on the pulse output
destination device as shown in the following table.
Use an FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later to use the interrupt input specification function.
Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later to set the user interrupt input command.
→ For operation of DVIT instruction, refer to Chapter 9.

Common Items

4.3.7

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

*1.

A device can only be specified if an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later is used.
When using an FX3UC PLC below Ver. 2.20, if "8" is set and then the specified interrupt positioning
(DVIT) instruction turns ON, an operation error (error code: K6763) will occur, and the instruction will
not cause any operation.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

After setting a number in the range of 9 to E for the interrupt input signal, if the corresponding interrupt
positioning (DVIT) instruction turns ON, an operation error (error code: K6763) will occur, and the
instruction will not cause any operation.

Example program:
The following program specifies the interrupt input signal for each pulse output destination device as shown in
the following table.
Pulse output
destination device
Y000

*1.

4.3.8

Interrupt input
signal

Setting value

X003

Y001

M8461

Y002

Unused

Y003*1

Unused

M8000

FNC 12
MOVP

RUN monitor

HFF83

D8336
M8336

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Change in Logic of interrupt input Signal (DVIT Instruction)
Turn the "Interrupt signal logic reverse" relay ON or OFF to specify the logic of the interrupt input signal of the
interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction.
→ For operation of DVIT instruction, refer to Chapter 9.
→ For details on the interrupt input signal designation method, refer to
Subsection 4.3.7.
Pulse output
destination device

"Interrupt signal logic
reverse" relay

Y000

M8347

Y001

M8357

Y002

M8367

Y003*1

M8377

*1.

Description
OFF: Positive logic (Turning the input ON will turn on the
interrupt input signal.)
ON: Negative logic (Turning the input OFF will turn on the
interrupt input signal.)

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Caution:

If a user interrupt input command (M8460 to M8463) is specified in the interrupt input signal, the logic of the
user interrupt input command cannot be specified. This is because turning on the user interrupt input
command will turn on the interrupt input signal.

B - 54

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Acceleration/Deceleration by PLSV Instruction

Common Items

4.3.9

4.3 Various Special Relays for Operation Commands

Output
pulse
frequency
Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz

Bias speed
Acceleration
time

Apx.
Example
Connection

Maximum speed
Initial value: 100,000 Hz

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Using an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later or FX3G PLC, if M8338 (acceleration/deceleration operation) is
turned on, the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction will be activated to accelerate/decelerate the
operation.
This means that if the command value of the output pulse frequency is changed, the operation will be
accelerated or decelerated to the changed output pulse frequency depending on the specified acceleration/
deceleration time.
→ For operation of PLSV instruction, refer to Chapter 10.

Deceleration time

Initial value: 100 ms Initial value: 100 ms

Caution:
• To enable acceleration/deceleration, turn on M8338 first, and then activate the variable speed pulse output
(PLSV) instruction.
• If acceleration/deceleration is enabled, the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instructions of all the pulse
output destination devices will accelerate/decelerate with the same time. This means that acceleration/
deceleration cannot be specified separately for each pulse output destination device.

B - 55

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.4 Current Value and Flag for Monitoring of Operation

4.4

Current Value and Flag for Monitoring of Operation

4.4.1

Current Value
During positioning operation, use the current value register to check the current value positioning address.
The current value will be increased or decreased depending on the rotation direction. The following table
shows the current value register (32-bit) of each pulse output destination device.
Pulse output destination device

Current value register (32-bit)

Y000

D8341,D8340

Y001

D8351,D8350

Y002*1

D8361,D8360

Y003*2

D8371,D8370

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Caution:
The current value changes between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. However, if an overflow or
underflow occurs, the value changes as shown below. Check the value carefully.
• If the current value is increased past the maximum value, the minimum value will be indicated.
• If the current value is decreased below the minimum value, the maximum value will be indicated.
Necessity of zero return:
If the specified forward rotation pulse or reverse rotation pulse is output, the current value register will
increase or decrease the current value. Upon turning off the power of the PLC, however, the current value
stored in the current value register will be erased. For this reason, after turning the power on again, be sure
to adjust the current value of the current value register to the current position of the machine. For this
adjustment, use the zero return instruction or the Absolute Current Value Read instruction (absolute position
detection system) shown below:
→ For details on DSZR instruction, refer to Section 6.2.
→ For details on ZRN instruction, refer to Section 6.3.
→ For details on ABS instruction, refer to Chapter 7.
Instruction
DSZR(FNC150)
ZRN(FNC156)
ABS(FNC155)*3

*3.

B - 56

Description
Zero return instruction with DOG search function
Zero return instruction (without DOG search function)
Absolute Current Value Read instruction

The absolute position detection function applies for the MR-HA, MR-J2A MR-J2SA, or MRJ3A servo amplifiers. If one of these servo amplifiers is used and mechanical zero return is
performed only once just before turning off the power, the current value will not be erased even after
power-off.
After turning on the power again, read out the stored current value using the ABS (FNC155)
instruction of the PLC. This means that the current value can be obtained without performing zero
return just after turning on the power again.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.4 Current Value and Flag for Monitoring of Operation

Completion of Instruction Execution ("Instruction execution complete" Flag,
"Instruction execution abnormal end" Flag)

• "Instruction execution complete" flag: Will be turned on if the instruction is executed properly.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Use the "Instruction execution complete" flag or "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag to check whether
execution of the positioning instruction has been completed properly.
The "Instruction execution complete" flag and "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag are turned on or off
after each instruction. Use these flags just after the execution of each instruction.
→ For programming details, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.

Common Items

4.4.2

4 Before Programming

• "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag: Will be turned on if the instruction is not executed properly.

Apx.

Caution:

4.4.3

"Pulse Output Monitor" (BUSY/READY) Flag
Use the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag to check whether pulses are being output to the pulse
output destination device. The following table shows the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag of each
pulse output destination device.

4.4.4

Pulse output
destination device

"Pulse output monitor"
(BUSY/READY) flag

Y000

M8340

Y001

M8350

Y002

M8360

Y003*2

M8370

Status of flag and pulse

Outputting pulse (BUSY):Flag = ON
Pulse outputting stopped (READY):Flag = OFF

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

"Positioning Instruction Activation" Flag
Use the "positioning instruction activation" flag of each pulse output destination device to check whether or
not a positioning instruction is being executed for the pulse output destination device. Use this flag to prevent
simultaneous activation of two or more positioning instructions for the same pulse output destination device.
Pulse output
destination device

"Positioning instruction
Activation" flag

Y000

M8348

Y001

M8358

Y002

M8368

Y003*2

M8378

Status of flag and pulse
ON: The positioning instruction is being activated for the
corresponding pulse output destination.
(Even after instruction execution is completed, if the
instruction is still being activated, the flag will not be
turned off.)
OFF: The positioning instruction is not being activated for the
corresponding pulse output destination.

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

B - 57

Example
Connection

If the "Instruction execution complete" flag or "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag is turned on, then the
execution of the instruction (pulse outputting operation, etc.) is complete. However, it is not certain whether
the servo motor has stopped or not. Check the "positioning completion" signal of the servo amplifier (drive
unit) to determine whether the servo motor has stopped.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

4.5

Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

4.5.1

Setting of Common Items Using Program
For each pulse output destination device (Y000, Y001, Y002*1, Y003*2), set the items shown in the following
table without using the operand of the instruction.
Setting
item

Setting device
Y000

Y001

Y002*1

Instruction
Y003*2

DSZR ZRN

ABS

TBL

PLSV DVIT

DRVI DRVA

Refer to

Items related to speed
speed*3

D8344, D8354, D8364, D8374,
D8343 D8353 D8363 D8373

3*4

Subsection
4.2.5

Bias speed

D8342 D8352 D8362 D8372

3*4

Subsection
4.2.6

Acceleration
D8348 D8358 D8368 D8378
time

3*4

3*5

Subsection
4.2.7

Deceleration
D8349 D8359 D8369 D8379
time

3*4

3*5

Subsection
4.2.8

D8347, D8357, D8367, D8377,
D8346 D8356 D8366 D8376

Subsection
4.2.3

Creep speed D8345 D8355 D8365 D8375

Subsection
4.2.4

Maximum

Zero return
speed

Items needed for (DSZR) zero return instruction with DOG search function and (ZRN) zero return instruction)
M8342 M8352 M8362 M8372

3*6

Subsection
4.3.3

CLEAR
M8341 M8351 M8361 M8371
signal output

Subsection
4.3.4

CLEAR
signal device M8464 M8465 M8466 M8467
D8464 D8465 D8466 D8467
change*7

Subsection
4.3.4

Logic of
near-point
signal

M8345 M8355 M8365 M8375

Subsection
4.3.5

M8346 M8356 M8366 M8376

Subsection
4.3.6

Subsection
4.3.9

Subsection
4.3.7

Zero return
direction

Logic of
zero-phase
signal

Items needed for variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction
Acceleration/
deceleration
Operation*5

M8338

Items needed for interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction*10
Interrupt
input signal
device
change*8

B - 58

M8336
D8336

*4, *10

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

A
Y000

Y001

Instruction

Y002*1 Y003*2 DSZR ZRN

ABS

TBL

M8460 M8461 M8462 M8463

Logic of
interrupt input M8347 M8357 M8367 M8377
signal

command *8

PLSV DVIT

DRVI DRVA

Refer to

Subsection
4.3.7

Subsection
4.3.8

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

User
interrupt
input

Setting device

Common Items

Setting
item

Apx.

*4, *10

Forward limit, reverse limit, and immediate stop of pulse output

Subsection
4.3.1

Reverse limit M8344 M8354 M8364 M8374

Subsection
4.3.1

Immediate
stop of pulse M8349 M8359 M8369 M8379
output*9

Subsection
4.3.2

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

32 bits are used for the maximum speed setting device and the zero return speed setting device.

*4.

Set this item using the PC parameter settings (positioning) of GX Developer (Ver.8.23Z or later) with
an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC. The settings data set by the parameter setting will
be stored in the corresponding device.

*5.

To accelerate or decelerate the operation using the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction
with an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or an FX3G PLC, it is necessary to set this item.
If the operation is not accelerated or decelerated, or if an FX3UC PLC below Ver.2.20 is used, the
PLSV instruction will not use this item even if it is set.

*6.

The ZRN instruction will not use any zero return direction setting devices. Using the program, adjust
the rotation direction output to the zero return direction.

*7.

This item can be set using an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or an FX3G PLC.

*8.

This item can be set using an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.1.30 or later.
The user interrupt input command, however, can only be set using an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or
later.

*9.

Use this function only if immediate stop is absolutely needed to avoid danger.

*10. Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

B - 59

Example
Connection

Forward limit M8343 M8353 M8363 M8373

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

Example program:
In the following program, the zero return instruction with DOG search function (DSZR), variable speed pulse
output (PLSV) instruction, and interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction are used for the pulse output
destination (Y000) under the conditions shown in the following table.
1) Set conditions
Setting item

Description of setting

Related Setting value
device or condition

Items related to speed
D8344,
D8343
(32-bit)

Maximum speed

30000Hz

K30000

Bias speed

10Hz

D8342

K10

Acceleration time

200ms

D8348

K200

Deceleration time

200ms

D8349

K200

Zero return speed

5000Hz

D8347,
D8346
(32-bit)

K5000

Creep speed

500Hz

D8345

K500

Items needed for DSZR instruction (zero return instruction with DOG search function) and ZRN instruction (zero
return instruction)
Zero return direction

Reverse rotation direction

CLEAR signal output
CLEAR signal device change*6

Output to Y010

M8342

OFF

M8341

M8464

D8464

H0010

Logic of near-point signal

Sets the positive logic (turning on the input will
M8345
turn on the near-point signal).

OFF

Logic of zero-phase signal

Sets the positive logic (turning on the input will
M8346
turn on the zero-phase signal).

OFF

Items needed for variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction
Acceleration/deceleration Operation

If X012 is turned on, the variable speed pulse
output (PLSV) instruction will be activated to M8338
accelerate or decelerate the operation.

ON:
If X012 = ON

Items needed for interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction*1
Interrupt input signal device change

Sets X007 for interrupt inputs.
M8336
Interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction will not
be used for the pulse output destinations
D8336
Y001, Y002, and Y003.

User interrupt input command

Do not use.

M8460

Logic of interrupt input signal

Sets the negative logic (turning off the input
will turn on the interruption signal).

M8347

ON
HFFF7

Forward limit, reverse limit, and immediate stop of pulse output

*1.

B - 60

Forward limit

If X010 is turned off (if the NC contact is
turned on), the limit switch will be activated.

M8343

ON:
If X010 = OFF

Reverse limit

If X011 is turned off (if the NC contact is
turned on), the limit switch will be activated.

M8344

ON:
If X011 = OFF

Immediate stop of pulse output

Do not use.

M8349

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
DMOV

K30000

D8343

Maximum speed (for Y000):
30000 Hz → (D8344, D8343)

FNC 12
MOV

K10

D8342

Bias speed (for Y000):
10 Hz → D8342

FNC 12
MOV

K200

D8348

Acceleration time (for Y000):
200 ms → D8348

FNC 12
MOV

K200

D8349

Deceleration time (for Y000):
200 ms → D8349

FNC 12
DMOV

K5000

D8346

Zero return speed (for Y000, DSZR instruction)
:5000 Hz → (D8347, D8346)

FNC 12
MOV

K500

D8345

Creep speed (for Y000, DSZR instruction)
:500 Hz, D8345

M8342

Zero return direction (for Y000, DSZR instruction)
:Reverse rotation direction

D8464

CLEAR signal output (for Y000)
:Y010

RUN
monitor

FNC 12
MOVP

H0010

M8464
M8341
M8000
RUN
monitor

X012
M8000
RUN
monitor

FNC 12
MOVP

HFFF7

M8345

Logic of near-point signal (for Y000)
:Positive logic

M8346

Logic for zero-phase signal
(for Y000, DSZR instruction)
:Positive logic

M8338

Acceleration/deceleration operation
(PLSV instruction)
:Enabled if X012 = ON

D8336
M8336

M8000

M8347

Logic of interruption input
signal:Negative logic

M8343

Forward rotation limit (for Y000)

M8344

Reverse rotation limit (for Y000)

RUN monitor

X010

X011

Interruption input signal device
(for Y000, DVIT instruction)
:X007 (Y001 to Y003 will not be used.)

B - 61

Apx.
Example
Connection

RUN monitor

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

M8000

Common Items

2) Set program

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.5.2

4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

Setting of High-Speed Output Special Adapter
If a high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) is used, the pulse output method can be selected
from "pulse train + direction" method and "forward/reverse rotation pulse train" method.

1. Setting of pulse output method
Using the pulse output method setting switch on the high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP),
set the pulse output method as shown in the following table.
The pulse output method setting should conform to the command pulse input method setting for the servo
amplifier (drive unit).
→ For details on the servo amplifier (drive unit), refer to the manual of the product used in your
system.
Position of
pulse output
method setting
switch
Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)
Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

FP RP side
•

Logic of
command
pulse

Pulse output method

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation H
pulse train (RP) L

•

Pulse train +
direction

OFF*1
Reverse rotation

Pulse train H

Negative
logic

Direction

*1.

Negative
logic

OFF*1

Forward rotation

PLS DIR side

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation H
pulse train (FP) L

H
L

ON*1

OFF*1

"ON" and "OFF" represent the statuses of the PLC output. "H" and "L" respectively represent the
HIGH status and the LOW status of the waveform.
→ For details on the relation between the PLC output and the waveform, refer to
Subsection 4.6.1.

Caution:
Use the Output Form Setting Switch while the PLC is in STOP or while the power is OFF. Do not operate the
Output Form Setting Switch while a pulse train is being generated.

2. Setting of rotation direction signal for positioning instruction
If a high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) is used, the rotation direction signal will be
assigned to each pulse output destination device as shown in the following table. Set the rotation direction
signal of the positioning instruction as shown in the following table:
Position of pulse output
method setting switch of highspeed output special adapter

FP RP side

Signal

Output number
1st adapter

2nd adapter

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)

Pulse output
destination:

Y000

Y001

Y002

Y003

Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

Rotation direction
signal

Y004

Y005

Y006

Y007

Pulse train

Pulse output
destination:

Y000

Y001

Y002

Y003

Direction

Rotation direction
signal

Y004

Y005

Y006

Y007

•

PLS DIR side
•

B - 62

Name of
positioning
instruction

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.5 Setting of Various Items on PLC Side

If a high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) is used, the same output will be used for both the
CLEAR signal and the rotation direction signal of the DSZR (FNC150) or ZRN (FNC156) instruction. For this
reason, it is necessary to change the CLEAR signal output device in order to output the CLEAR signal.
→ For details on the CLEAR signal device change method, refer to Subsection 4.3.4.
CLEAR signal device
initially set

1st axis

2nd axis

3rd axis

4th axis

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Y002

Y006

Y003

Y007

1st adapter

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Rotation direction signal
(reverse rotation pulse train / direction)

Pulse output
destination device

Common Items

3. CLEAR signal and rotation direction signal

2nd adapter

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 63

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.6

4 Before Programming
4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side
→ For details on the servo amplifier (drive unit), refer to the manual of the product used in your
system.

4.6.1

Setting the Command Pulse Method
1. Pulse output method on PLC side
1) Main unit (transistor output (sink output))
If the main unit (transistor output (sink output)) is used, the pulse output signals (pulse output destination
and rotation direction) will be as shown in the following figure:
Forward
rotation
Pulse output
destination: Y000

H
L
H
L

Any output: Y
(Rotation direction
designation)
Pulse output
destination: Y001

H
L
H
L

Any output: Y
(Rotation direction
designation)

*1.

Reverse
rotation
Pulse output
destination: Y002

ON*1

OFF *1

Any output: Y
(Rotation direction
designation)

H
L
H
L

Forward
rotation

Reverse
rotation

ON *1

OFF *1

"ON" and "OFF" represent the statuses of the PLC output. "H" and "L" respectively represent the
HIGH and LOW status of the waveform.
→ For details on the relation between the PLC output and the waveform, refer to the next pages.

2) High-speed output special adapter (Pulse train + Direction Setting)
When setting the Output Form Setting Switch of the high speed output special adapter to the "PLS•DIR"
position, the pulse output signals (pulse output destination signal and rotation direction signal) will be as
shown in the following figure:
Forward
rotation

*1.

B - 64

Pulse output
destination: Y000

H
L

Rotation direction
designation: Y004

H
L

Pulse output
destination: Y001

H
L

Rotation direction
designation: Y005

H
L

Reverse
rotation

Forward
rotation

Reverse
rotation

ON*1

OFF *1

ON*1

OFF *1

Pulse output
H
destination: Y002 L
ON*1

OFF *1

Rotation direction H
designation: Y006 L
Pulse output
H
destination: Y003 L

ON*1

OFF *1

Rotation direction H
designation: Y007 L

"ON" and "OFF" represent the statuses of the PLC output. "H" and "L" respectively represent the
HIGH status and the LOW status of the waveform.
→ For details on the relation between the high-speed output special adapter output and
the waveform, refer to the next pages.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

Forward
rotation

Pulse output
destination: Y004
(Reverse rotation
pulse train)

H
L

Pulse output
destination: Y001
(Forward rotation
pulse train)

H
L

Pulse output
destination: Y005
(Reverse rotation
pulse train)

H
L

OFF *1

Pulse output
destination: Y006 H
(Reverse rotation L
pulse train)

OFF *1

OFF *

Pulse output
destination: Y002 H
(Forward rotation L
pulse train)

OFF *1

Apx.

Pulse output
destination: Y003 H
(Forward rotation L
pulse train)
Pulse output
destination: Y007 H
(Reverse rotation L
pulse train)

Reverse
rotation

Example
Connection

H
L

Forward
rotation

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Pulse output
destination: Y000
(Forward rotation
pulse train)

Reverse
rotation

A
Common Items

3) High-speed output special adapter (Forward/Reverse Pulse Train setting)
When setting the Output Form Setting Switch of the high speed output special adapter to the "FP•RP"
position, the pulse output signals will be as shown in the following figure.

OFF *1

*1.

"ON" and "OFF" represent the statuses of the PLC output. "H" and "L" respectively represent the
HIGH status and the LOW status of the waveform.
→ For details on the relation between high-speed output special adapter output and the waveform,
refer to the next pages.

B - 65

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

Reference: Image of PLC output and waveform (for MELSERVO-J3 Series servo amplifier)
1) Base unit (transistor output (sink output))
a) Connection of PLC to servo amplifier
When a FX3U Series PLC (sink output) is used, it is connected as shown below.
MR-J3A servo
amplifier
FX3U-32MT/ES
(Transistor output
(sink output))
COM1
Y000
COM2

OPC 12

24V DC
DOCOM

Plate

Pulse train
Direction

Y004

b) Image of PLC output and output waveform
Pulse train signal
(Y000)
ON
Image of output
ON/OFF operation OFF
Output waveform

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

High
Low

Direction output
(Y004)
ON
Image of output
ON/OFF operation OFF
High
Output waveform

Low

2) High-speed output special adapter (set to "pulse train + direction")
a) Connection of PLC to servo amplifier
MR-J3A servo
amplifier

FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Equivalent
to AM26C31

SGA

Y0/2+
Y0/2Y4/6+
Y4/6SGA

Pulse train

Direction

PP
PG
NP
NG

10
11
35
36

Plate

b) Image of PLC output and output waveform
The output waveform shown below is based on the SGA terminal of the high-speed output special
adapter. If the SGB side of the high-speed output special adapter is used, the output waveform will be
that of the SGB terminal.
Pulse train signal
(Y000)
ON
Image of output
ON/OFF operationOFF
+ High
Output
Low
waveform
High
- Low
Direction output
(Y004)
ON
Image of output
ON/OFF operation OFF
+ High
Output
Low
waveform
High
- Low

B - 66

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Equivalent
to AM26C31

Reverse rotation
pulse train

PP
PG
NP
NG

10
11
35
36

Plate

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

SGA

MR-J3A servo
amplifier

Forward rotation
pulse train

Y0/2+
Y0/2Y4/6+
Y4/6SGA

Common Items

3) High-speed output special adapter (set to "forward/reverse rotation pulse train")
a) Connection of PLC to servo amplifier

Forward rotation

Forward rotation pulse
train(Y000)

Reverse rotation

Image of output
ON/OFF operation OFF
+ High
Output
Low
waveform
High
- Low
Reverse rotation pulse
train(Y004)
ON
Image of output
ON/OFF operation OFF
+ High
Output
Low
waveform
High
- Low

2. Setting of command pulse input method for servo amplifier (drive unit)
Set the following servo amplifier (drive unit) parameter so that the pulse train input method of the servo
amplifier (drive unit) matches the pulse output method of the PLC as shown in the following tables.

Servo amplifier
(drive unit)

Pulse output method of main unit

Pulse output method of high-speed output
special adapter

Transistor output (sink output)

Differential line driver

Pulse train + direction

Pulse train +
direction

Forward rotation pulse train,
reverse rotation pulse train

"Pulse train + sign"

"Pulse train +
sign"

Forward rotation pulse train,
Reverse rotation pulse train

"Negative logic"

Command pulse input
method
Logic of command pulse

Parameter setting for each series of MELSERVO servo amplifier:
Set value
Parameter No.

Pulse train + direction
Negative logic

forward/reverse rotation pulse
train
Negative logic

MR-J3

0011

0010

MR-J2,MR-J2S

0011

0010

MR-C

011

010

MR-H

011*1

010*1

MR-J

1*1

0*1

Series

*1. is for settings other than the command pulse output form.
→ For details, refer to the Servo amplifier manual.

B - 67

Apx.
Example
Connection

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.6.2

4 Before Programming
4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

Setting of Electronic Gear (For MELSERVO Series)
Use the electronic gear of the servo motor to set the transfer distance per pulse.
For details on the electronic gear setting, refer to the manual of the servo motor or servo amplifier, and set an
optimum value depending on the application.

Setting example 1:
To set the transfer distance per pulse to 10 µm (if the machine uses a ball screw):
Machine specifications

Servo amplifier

MR-C Series

Rated rotational speed of servo motor

3000r/min

Lead of ball screw (Pb)

10mm (0.4")/rev

Reduction ratio (mechanical gear) (n)

1/2

Resolution of servo motor (Pt)

4000PLS/REV

CMX =
CDV

0×

Pt
n×Pb

= 10×10-3×

4000
1/2×10

n=NL/NM=1/2
NL

8
1

Set the electronic gear as follows:
CMX = 8, CDV = 1
In this case, when the main unit outputs the maximum output
pulse frequency (100 kHz), the servo motor rotational speed
will be as follows:

N0 = CMX × 60 × f0
Pt
CDV
60
8
=
×
× 100000
1
4000

Pb=10[mm](0.4")

Servo motor
Pt = 4000 (PLS/REV)
f0

: Command pulse frequency [Hz]
(Open collector system)
CMX : Electronic gear
(numerator of command pulse
multiplying factor)
CDV : Electronic gear
(denominator of command pulse
multiplying factor)
N0 : Servo motor rotational speed [r/min]
0 : Transfer distance per pulse [mm]

= 12000r/min > 3000r/min (Rated rotational speed of servo motor)
It is necessary to reduce the pulse frequency on the PLC side in order to reduce the servo motor rotational
speed so that it is less than the rated rotational speed.

B - 68

Pulse output destination device

Maximum speed setting device

Y000

D8344,D8343

Y001

D8354,D8353

Y002*1

D8364,D8363

Y003*2

D8374,D8373

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.6 Setting of Various Items on Servo Amplifier (Drive Unit) Side

A
Common Items

Setting example 2:
To set the transfer distance per pulse to 0.01° (if a turntable is used):
Machine specifications
MR-J2S Series

Rated rotational speed of servo motor

3000r/min

Turntable

360°/REV

Reduction ratio (mechanical gear) (n)
(Timing belt)

8/64

Resolution of servo motor (Pt)

131072PLS/REV

0×

Pt
n×360

= 1×10-2×

131072 = 32768
1125
8/64×360

Set the electronic gear as follows:
CMX = 32768, CDV = 1125
In this case, when the main unit outputs the maximum output
pulse frequency (100 kHz), the servo motor rotational speed will
be as follows:

Turntable

Timing belt: 8/64
f0

: Command pulse frequency [Hz]
(open collector system)
CMX : Electronic gear
(numerator of command pulse
multiplying factor)
CDV : Electronic gear
(denominator of command pulse
multiplying factor)
N0 : Servo motor rotational speed [r/min]
0 : Transfer distance per pulse [° ]

N0 = CMX × 60 × f0
Pt
CDV
60
= 32768 ×
× 100000
1125
131072
..
1333.33
r/min < 3000r/min (Rated rotational speed)
It is not necessary to restrict the maximum speed on the PLC side because the servo motor rotational speed
is less than the rated rotational speed.

4.6.3

Setting of "Servo Ready" Signal (MELSERVO MR-C Series)
If the following parameter is set as shown in the following table for the MELSERVO MR-C Series, pin 3 of the
CN1 connector of the servo amplifier will be changed to "servo ready" (RD). Note that the following parameter
should be set for the example programs shown in Chapter 12.
Series
MR-C

Parameter No. Setting value
21

020

B - 69

Apx.
Example
Connection

CMX =
CDV

Servo motor
Pt = 131072 (PLS/REV)

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Servo amplifier

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.7

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

Items To Be Observed in Programming
This section describes various programming items that will not be affected by any pulse output destination
devices (hardware).
For information on the pulse output destination devices (hardware) that are affected by programming items,
refer to the following sections.
→ To use the transistor output of the main unit, also refer to Section 4.8.
→ To use the high-speed output special adapter, also refer to Section 4.9.

4.7.1

Positioning Instruction Activation Timing
The following positioning instructions can be programmed as many times as needed. However, observe the
items shown in the following table to determine the instruction activation timing.
Instruction to be used
Description
DSZR(FNC150)

Zero return instruction with
DOG search function

Instruction to be used

Interrupt Positioning
DVIT(FNC151)*2 (interruption fixed-feed)

TBL

ABS

ZRN

PLSV DRVI DRVA

TBL(FNC152)

Positioning by batch setting
method

ABS(FNC155)

Current ABS value read-out
from servo amplifier*1

ZRN(FNC156)

Zero return (without DOG
search function)

PLSV(FNC157)

Variable speed Pulse Output

DRVI(FNC158)

Drive to Increment

DRVA(FNC159) Drive to Absolute

DSZR

DVIT

If the pulse output destination device is now outputting pulses, the instruction cannot be activated. Refer
to the "Note" below.

: For the absolute position detection system, activate the ABS (FNC155) instruction after turning the
power ON for the servo amplifier. After executing this instruction, the current value will be read out from
the servo amplifier*1 only once.
Turning this instruction OFF will turn the servo amplifier OFF*1.
*1.

The ABS (FNC155) instruction can be used with the absolute position detection system of the
MELSERVO-J3, -J2(S), and -H Series.

*2.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Caution:
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, and if a positioning instruction (excluding the ABS
instruction) or pulse output instruction (PLSR, PLSY) specifies the same pulse output destination device
as the one being used, the instruction cannot be executed.
Even after turning the instruction activation contact OFF, if the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY)
flag is still on, do not execute a positioning instruction (including the PLSR and PLSY instructions) for an
output with the same output number.
Before activating such an instruction, check that the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is off,
and then wait until 1 cycle or more of operation has been completed.
→ For examples of programs, refer to Chapter 12.
Pulse output destination device

"Pulse output monitor" flag

Y000

M8340

Y001

M8350

M8360

M8370

Y002

Y003

B - 70

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Use with PLSY (FNC57) and PLSR (FNC59) instructions:

• Do not use the same output number for both a positioning instruction (FNC150 - FNC159) and a pulse
output instruction (FNC57 or FNC59).

Current value register

Pulse output
destination device

For FNC150 - FNC159 instructions

For FNC57 and FNC59 instructions

Y000

D8341,D8340

D8141,D8140

Y001

D8351,D8350

D8143,D8142

D8361,D8360

Y003*2

D8371,D8370

Y002

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

• If it is necessary to use a positioning instruction (FNC150 to FNC159) together with a pulse output
instruction (FNC57 or FNC59), use the following positioning instruction in place of the pulse output
instruction:
- FNC57(PLSY), FNC59(PLSR)→FNC158(DRVI)

B - 71

Apx.
Example
Connection

• The use of a positioning instruction together with a PLSY or PLSR instruction will complicate the operation
of the register that controls the number of output pulses (see the following table). For this reason, it is
recommended that a positioning instruction should be used in place of the PLSY or PLSR instruction.
→ For details on the related devices, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Along with the positioning instructions (FNC150 - FNC159), the pulse output instructions (FNC57 and FNC59)
require hardware for outputting pulses.

A
Common Items

*1.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.7.2

4 Before Programming
4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

STOP instruction
For the normal stop of an operation (stop after speed reduction), use the "instruction OFF" function or
"forward/reverse limit relay".
If an immediate stop is absolutely needed to avoid danger, use the pulse output stop command relay.
During execution of a positioning instruction, however, if the pulse output stop command relay is turned on,
the pulse outputting operation will be immediately stopped. This means that the motor will be stopped without
deceleration, which may damage the system. For this reason, take caution when using the pulse output stop
command relay.
Pulse output destination
device

Pulse stop instruction

Y000

M8349

Y001

M8359

Y002*1

M8369

M8379

Y003

4.7.3

*1.

Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.

*2.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if 2 high-speed output special adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Correction of Backlash
The built-in positioning function cannot correct the mechanical backlash (clearance, play). If it is necessary to
correct the backlash, preliminarily set the number of output pulses considering the backlash that may be
caused while reversing the transfer direction.
Table
Feed screw

Backlash
(clearance, play)

4.7.4

"Instruction execution complete" Flag of Positioning Instruction and Completion of
Positioning
If the Instruction execution complete flag (M8029) or the Instruction execution abnormal end flag (M8329) is
turned on, the execution of the instruction (pulse outputting operation, etc.) is completed. In this case,
however, it is not certain whether the servo motor has stopped. Check the "positioning completion" signal of
the servo amplifier (drive unit) to check whether the servo motor is stopped.
→ For details on "Instruction execution complete" flag and "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag,
refer to Subsection 4.4.2.

B - 72

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

Good
example:

Apx.
FNC158
DDRVI
M8029
The M8029 will function
as the "instruction
execution complete"
flag of DRVI instruction.

Completion
of instruction
execution

M8329
Abnormal
completion of
instruction execution

The M8029 will function
as the "instruction
execution complete"
flag of DRVA instruction.

FNC159
DDRVA
M8029
Completion
of instruction
execution

M8329
Abnormal
completion of
instruction execution
The M8029 will function
M8029
as the "instruction
execution complete" flag Completion of
instruction
of the lower DPLSV
execution
instruction.

M8000

The M8029 will function
as the "instruction
execution complete" flag
of the lower DSW
instruction.

X000

K100000 K50000

RST

K10000 K30000

RST

FNC 72
DSW

X10

SET

FNC157
DPLSV

K1000

The M8029 will function
as the "instruction
M8029
execution complete" flag
FNC 22
D0
of the upper DPLSV
MUL
Complinstruction.
etion of instruction execution

FNC157
DPLSV

K1000

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Example
Connection

Bad
example:

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1) If two or more positioning instructions are used in a program, the "Instruction execution complete" flag
(M8029) or "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on or off after execution of
each instruction. However, if the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) and "Instruction execution
abnormal end" flag are used together for a program, it is difficult to determine which instruction turns them
ON/OFF and the "Instruction execution complete" flag will not be turned on for the intended instruction.
→ To use a positioning instruction at a position other than just below the instruction, refer to the
example shown on the next page.

A
Common Items

Programming using "Instruction execution complete" flag and "Instruction execution abnormal end"
flag:

Program for upper DPLSV
instruction

Y10

Y002

Y006

Upper DPLSV instruction

K10

D20

Program for DSW
instruction

Y001

Y005

Lower DPLSV instruction

B - 73

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

2) To use at a position other than just below the positioning instruction:
If two or more positioning instructions are used in a program, the "Instruction execution complete" flag
(M8029) and "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on or off after execution of
each instruction.
If it is necessary to use the "Instruction execution complete" flag or "Instruction execution abnormal end"
flag at a point other than just below the instruction, turn on or off another bit device just below the
instruction, and use the contact as the command contact.

M8000
Switches "instruction
execution complete"
flag of the DSW
instruction from M8029
to M100.

X10

Y10

M8029

FNC158
DDRVI

M100

Completion
of instruction
execution

Switches the
"instruction execution
complete" flag of the
DDRVI instruction from
M8029 to M200.

FNC 72
DSW

K10000 K10000

M8029

Y000

RST

Completion
of instruction
execution

Y004

M200
Functions as the instruction
execution complete flag of
the DSW instruction.
M100
FNC 22
MUL
Functions as the instruction
execution complete flag of the
DDRVI instruction.
M200

K10

D20

Y030

B - 74

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

Operation Error Flag
When there is an error in the applied instruction configuration, target device or target device number range
and an error occurs while operation is executed, the following flag turns ON and the error information is
stored.

1. Operation error
Error code storage device

M8067

D8067

Error detected step number storage device
FX3U/FX3UC PLC

FX3G PLC

D8315,D8314,D8069

D8069

• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLC, D8315 and D8314 (32 bits) store the error occurrence step number.
When the error occurrence step is up to the 32767th step, the error occurrence step can be checked in
D8069 (16 bits).
• In the FX3G PLC, D8069 stores the error occurrence step number.
• If an operation error occurs at another step, the error code and error step number of the instruction will be
sequentially updated. (If the error status is canceled, the error flag will be turned off.)
• If the PLC is stopped and restarted without canceling the error status, the error status will be automatically
canceled, but immediately after that, the error flag will be turned on again.

2. Operation error latch
Error flag

Error code storage device

M8068

Error detected step number storage device
FX3U/FX3UC PLC

FX3G PLC

D8313,D8312,D8068

D8068

• When an operation error occurs, M8068 is turned on.
• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLC, D8313 and D8312 (32 bits) store the error occurrence step number.
When the error occurrence step is up to the 32767th step, the error occurrence step can be checked in
D8068 (16 bits).
• In the FX3G PLC, D8068 stores the error occurrence step number.
• If a new error is caused by another instruction, the error data will not be updated, and the operation will be
continued until the "forced reset" command is input or the power is turned off.

4.7.6

Write during RUN
Do not change a program if a positioning instruction (FNC150, FNC151, FNC156 to FNC159) is being
executed (pulses are being output) in the RUN mode. Operations will be performed as shown in the following
table if a program is changed during instruction execution in RUN mode.
Instruction
DSZR(FNC150)
DVIT(FNC151)*1

If program is changed in circuit block
including currently-activated instruction
Decelerates and stops pulse output.

TBL(FNC152)

Program cannot be changed in the RUN mode.

ZRN(FNC156)

Decelerates and stops pulse output.

PLSV
(FNC157)

During operation with acceleration/deceleration*2

Decelerates and stops pulse output.

During operation without acceleration/deceleration

Immediately stops pulse output.

DRVI(FNC158)
DRVA(FNC159)

Decelerates and stops pulse output.

*1.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*2.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.
If an FX 3UC PLC is used and its version is below Ver.2.20, operation will be performed without
acceleration/deceleration.

B - 75

Apx.
Example
Connection

• When an operation error has occurred, M8067 is set, D8067 stores the operation error code number in
which the error has occurred.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Error flag

Common Items

4.7.5

4.7 Items To Be Observed in Programming

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4.8

4 Before Programming

4.8 Items To Be Observed When Using the Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Items To Be Observed When Using the Main Unit (Transistor Output)
1. Pulse output destination devices
Use Y000, Y001, and Y002*1 transistor outputs of the main unit for the pulse output destination devices.
Do not use the transistor output Y003 of the main unit for positioning instructions. If Y003 is used for a positioning
instruction, PLC failure may occur.

2. Pulse output method
Adjust the pulse output method of the transistor output of the main unit to conform with the command pulse
input method of the servo amplifier (drive unit).
If the pulse output method is not properly adjusted, the servo amplifier (drive unit) may not perform the
intended operation.
→ For details on the servo amplifier (drive unit), refer to the manual of the product used in your
system.
→ For details on the pulse output method of the main unit, refer to Subsection 4.6.1.

3. Output pulse frequency (including zero return speed)
If more than 100,000 Hz pulse is output from the transistor output terminal of the main unit to perform the
operation, it may cause PLC failure.
The output pulse frequency and the zero return speed should be equal to or less than the maximum frequency
of the servo amplifier (drive unit).

4. Load current
To use a positioning instruction for the transistor output Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 of the main unit, adjust the
load current of the open collector transistor output to 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
Item
Operation voltage range

5 to 24V DC

Operation current range

10 to 100mA

Output pulse frequency

100 kHz or less

*1.

4.9

Description

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

Caution for Using the High-Speed Output Special Adapter
(FX3U-2HSY-ADP)
1. Output terminals to be used
If the high-speed output special adapter is connected, output numbers will be assigned in the same way as
the main unit as shown in the following table. Use the output terminals of one side (main unit side or highspeed output special adapter side), and do not connect lines to the output terminals of the unused side.
The outputs of the high-speed output special adapter and the main will operate as follows.
Assignment of output numbers
Position of pulse output method
setting switch of high-speed
output special adapter

FP RP side
•

Signal

Name of
positioning
instruction

Output number
1st adapter

2nd adapter

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)

Pulse output
destination

Y000

Y001

Y002

Y003

Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

Rotation
direction signal

Y004

Y005

Y006

Y007

Pulse train

Pulse output
destination

Y000

Y001

Y002

Y003

Direction

Rotation
direction signal

Y004

Y005

Y006

Y007

PLS DIR side
•

B - 76

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming

4.9 Caution for Using the High-Speed Output Special Adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP)

A
Operation of output
Instruction for outputting pulse train at high speed

Other instructions

If the instruction turns ON, the corresponding output will
be turned on (the corresponding LED will be turned on).

Can be activated.

FX3U PLC main unit of transistor
output type

Can be activated.*1

Can be activated.

High-speed output special adapter Can be activated.

Can be activated.

• If an output number of the high-speed output special adapter is used (if an output of the high-speed output
special adapter is connected), do not use (connect) the corresponding output terminal of the main unit.

*1. The output frequency limit of the main unit transistor output is 100 kHz. When operating a load with a pulse
frequency exceeding 100 kHz, PLC failure may occur.

2. Rotation direction signal of positioning instruction
If an FX3U-2HSY-ADP high-speed output special adapter is used, the rotational direction signal will be
assigned to each pulse output destination device as shown in the following table. Do not assign any other
outputs to these devices using positioning instructions, etc.
→ For details, refer to Subsection 4.5.2.
Pulse output
destination device

Rotation direction signal
(reverse rotation pulse train / direction)
1st adapter
1st axis

2nd axis

2nd adapter
3rd axis

Initial setting of
CLEAR signal

4th axis

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Y002

Y006

Y003

Y007

3. CLEAR signal and rotation direction signal
If an FX3U-2HSY-ADP high-speed output special adapter is used, outputs for the rotation direction signal of
the DSZR (FNC150) or ZRN (FNC156) instruction and the CLEAR signal will overlap as shown in the table
above.
For this reason, in order to output the CLEAR signal, change the CLEAR signal device.
→ For details on the CLEAR signal device change method, refer to Subsection 4.3.4.

4. Pulse output method for high-speed output special adapter
Adjust the pulse output method of the high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) so that the pulse
output method conforms to the command pulse input method of the servo amplifier (drive unit).
If the pulse output method is not properly adjusted, the servo amplifier (drive unit) may not perform the
intended operation.
→ For details on the servo amplifier (drive unit), refer to the manual of the product to be used for your
system.
→ For details on the pulse output method, refer to Subsection 4.6.1 or Subsection 4.5.2.

5. Output pulse frequency (including zero return speed)
Set the output pulse frequency and the zero return speed so that these values can be less than the maximum
frequency value of the servo amplifier (driver unit).

B - 77

Apx.
Example
Connection

• If an output number of the main unit is used (if an output of the main unit is connected), do not use
(connect) the corresponding output terminal of the high-speed output special adapter.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Main unit of relay output type

Common Items

Operation of output

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

4 Before Programming

Built-in Positioning Functions

4.10

4.10 Format and Execution of Applied Instruction

Format and Execution of Applied Instruction

Instruction and operand:
- Function numbers (FNC00 - FNC) and symbols (mnemonic codes) are assigned to the applied
instructions of the PLC. For example, a symbol of "SMOV" (shift) is assigned to FNC13.
- Some applied instructions consist of the instruction area only, but many applied instructions consist of
the instruction area and the operand.
Command
input

m, n

FNC158
DRVI

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

: An operand that will not be affected by the execution of the instruction is referred to as a
source. This symbol represents a source.
If the operand device number can be modified by an index register, "•" will be added, and
the S will be modified to S . If there are two or more sources, the modified sources will
become S1 , S2 , and so on.
: An operand that will be affected by the execution of the instruction is referred to as a
destination. This symbol represents a destination.
If the device numbers can be indexed by index registers, and if there are two or more
destinations, the modified destinations will become D1 , D2 , and so on.
: The operands not corresponding to source and destination are indicated as "m" and "n".
If the device number can be indexed by index registers, and if there are two or more
operands, the modified operands will become m1 , m2 , n1 , n2 , and so on.
•

•

- Regarding program steps, the instruction area for each applied instruction is 1 step. The operand of
each applied instruction, however, has 2 or 4 steps depending on the number of bits (16 or 32 bits).

Devices for operands:
- Bit devices X, Y, M, and S can be used for the operands, depending on the function.
- Combination of these bit devices, such as KnX, KnY, KnM, and KnS, can be used for numeric data.
→ Refer to the programming manual.
- Current value registers, such as data registers D, timers T, and counters C, can be used.
- A data register D consists of 16 bit. Two consecutive data registers (2 points) are used for 32-bit data.
For example, if data register D0 is specified for the operand of a 32-bit instruction, D1 and D0 will be
used for 32-bit data (D1 for the 16 high-order bits, and D0 for the 16 low-order bits).
If current value registers T and C are used as general data registers, they will behave the same way as
data registers.
Each 32-bit counter (C200 to C255), however, can use 32-bit data without combining two counters.
These counters, however, cannot be specified as the operands of 16-bit instructions.

B - 78

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

4 Before Programming
4.10 Format and Execution of Applied Instruction

Depending on the sizes of the numeric values to be processed, applied instructions can be classified into two
types: 16-bit instructions and 32-bit instructions. In addition, depending on the execution type, these
instructions can also be classified into two types: continuous execution type and pulse execution type.
Depending on the applied instruction, the instruction may or may not have all the combinations.

- Depending on the bit length of the numeric data to be processed, applied instructions can be classified
into two types: 16-bit type and 32-bit type.
Command 1

D10

D12

Move D10 to D12.

FNC 12
DMOV

D20

D22

This instruction transfers data from D21 and D20 to D23
and D22.

Apx.

- For the 32-bit instruction, the instruction name will be DMOV ("D" will be added to "MOV").
- Even numbered devices or odd numbered devices can be specified. If a double device is specified, the
specified device will be combined with the device with the next number (for the word devices, such as
devices T, C, and D).
To prevent confusion, it is recommended to use even numbered devices to specify the low-order bits of
an operand of a 32-bit instruction.
- Each 32-bit counter (C200 to C255) needs only one device to set 32 bits. For this reason, the operand
of a 16-bit instruction cannot specify any of the 32-bit counters.

2. Pulse execution type instructions and continuous execution type instructions
Pulse execution type instructions:
The program shown in the right figure shows that when X000 is
turned on, the instruction will be executed only once. If X000 is
off, the instruction will not be executed. If it is not necessary to
execute the instruction frequently, the pulse execution type
instruction is recommended. Note that "P" means that the
instruction of pulse execution type. This means that DMOVP is a
pulse execution type instruction.
Continuous execution type instructions:
The program shown in the right figure shows that if X001 is on,
the continuous execution type MOV instruction will be executed
at the start of each operation cycle.

X000

X001

FNC 12
MOVP

D10

D12

FNC 12
MOV

D10

D12

Note that if FNC24 (INC) or FNC25 (DEC) is used as a continuous execution type instruction, the
destination will be changed at the start of each operation cycle.
To indicate continuous execution type instructions, the symbol "
" will be added to the title of each
instruction as shown in the following figure. Use these instructions carefully.

FNC
D

Number
12

Instruction
MOVname

Note that if the activation input X000 or X001 is off, instructions will not be executed. Also note that if the
later symbol is not added to the title of an instruction, the destination of the instruction will not be changed.

B - 79

Example
Connection

Command 2

FNC 12
MOV

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1. 16-bit instructions and 32-bit instructions

Common Items

Format and execution of instruction:

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

Operation Test
This chapter describes the operation test of positioning instructions. During forward rotation (JOG+)
operation and reverse rotation (JOG-) operation, the test checks whether positioning instructions are properly
activated.

B - 80

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

B - 81

Apx.
Example
Connection

STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to I/O connectors.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
• Connect input/output cables securely to their designated connectors.
Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
• Make sure to properly wire the FX3U/FX3G Series main unit and FX0N/FX2N Series extension equipment in
accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.
• Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.22 and 0.25 N•m.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
• Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, a short-circuit, wire breakage, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 and 0.8 N•m.

Common Items

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

5.1

1
2

5.1 Test Procedure

Test Procedure
Turn off the power to the PLC.
Temporarily connect the limit switches (forward rotation limit 1, reverse
rotation limit 1) and the manual switches (forward rotation, reverse rotation).
Connect the limit switches and the manual switches to the following input terminals of the PLC.
Do not connect the servo amplifier (drive unit).
→ For details on connection, refer to Chapter 3 of the Hardware Edition of the PLC.
→ For details on the forward rotation limit and the reverse rotation limit, refer to Subsection 4.3.1.
Signal
Limit switch
Manual switch

3
4
5
6

Input number

Forward rotation limit 1

NC contact

X010

Reverse rotation limit 1

NC contact

X011

Forward rotation (JOG+)

NO contact

X012

Reverse rotation (JOG-)

NO contact

X013

Create the test program.
→ For details on the test program, refer to Section 5.2.

Turn on the power to the PLC.
Transfer the test program to the main unit.
→ For details, refer to the manual of the programming tool.

Check the input indicator lamp (LED lamp).
When the programming controller is stopped, activate the temporarily connected input terminals,
and check the status of each input indicator lamp (LED lamp).
If an FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC is used, check the input statuses using the display module.
Signal

B - 82

Input signal

Status of LED indicator lamp

Forward rotation limit 1

X010

Activation of the forward rotation limit switch 1 will turn off the LED
indicator lamp of X010 (turn off X010).

Reverse rotation limit 1

X011

Activation of the reverse rotation limit switch 1 will turn off the LED
indicator lamp of X011 (turn off X011).

Forward rotation (JOG+)

X012

Turning on the forward rotation (JOG+) switch will turn on the LED
indicator lamp of X012.

Reverse rotation (JOG-)

X013

Turning on the reverse rotation (JOG-) switch will turn on the LED
indicator lamp of X013.

Switch the PLC into RUN mode.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

A
Check the operation in the forward rotation direction.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Check the output indicator lamp (LED lamp) and the current value register to monitor the operation.
The status of the LED indicator lamp and the value indicated in the current value register depend
on the pulse output destination or rotation direction set by the positioning instruction. However, if
the pulse output destination or the rotation direction is changed for the test program, carefully read
the status of the output indicator lamp (LED lamp) and the value indicated in the current value
register to monitor the change.

Common Items

5.1 Test Procedure

1. Operation in forward rotation direction

Input signal

Status

X010

X011

X013

OFF

1) LED indicator lamp check
Check the LED indicator lamps of the PLC or the display module to see whether or not the outputs are
turned on. The status of each output should be as shown in the following table:

If transistor outputs of the
main unit are used

If a high-speed output
special adapter is used

Pulse output
method

LED lamp of
output

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y000

Turned on and off at high speed.

Y004

Kept ON.

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y0/2

Turned on and off at high speed.

Y4/6

Kept ON.

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)
Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

Y0/2

Turned on and off at high speed.

Y4/6

Kept OFF.

Status of LED lamp (output)

2) Current value register (D8341, D8340) check
Monitor the current value register (D8341, D8340) of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC using the programming
tool, and confirm that the value is being increased.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

2. Stop of operation
Turn off the forward rotation (JOG+) switch (X012) to stop the operation in the forward rotation direction.
1) LED indicator lamp check
Check the LED indicator lamps of the PLC or the display module to check whether the outputs are turned
on. The status of each output should be as shown in the following table:

If transistor outputs of the
main unit are used

If the high-speed output
special adapter is used

Pulse output
method

LED lamp
of output

Status of LED lamp (output)

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y000

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

Y004

Kept ON.

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y0/2

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

Y4/6

Kept ON.

Y0/2

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

Y4/6

Kept OFF.

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)
Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

2) Current value register (D8341, D8340) check
Monitor the current value register (D8341, D8340) of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC using the programming
tool, and confirm that the value is not being increased.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

B - 83

Apx.
Example
Connection

Turn on the forward rotation (JOG+) switch (X012), and verify that the operation is performed in the
forward rotation direction. For this check, set the other inputs as follows:

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

5.1 Test Procedure

Check the operation of the forward rotation limit switch.
During operation in the forward rotation direction (at step 8), turn off the forward rotation limit switch
1 (X010), and confirm that the operation in the forward rotation direction is stopped.
The LED indicator lamps and the current value register (D8341, D8340) will enter the same
statuses as the stop statuses described in step 8.
In addition, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will turn on.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

10 Check the operation in the reverse rotation direction.
Check the output indicator lamp (LED lamp) and the current value register to monitor the operation.
The status of the LED indicator lamp and the value indicated in the current value register depend
on the pulse output destination or rotation direction set by the positioning instruction. However, if
the pulse output destination or the rotation direction is changed for the test program, carefully read
the status of the output indicator lamp (LED lamp) and the value indicated in the current value
register to monitor the change.
1. Operation in reverse rotation direction
Turn on the reverse rotation (JOG-) switch (X013), and verify that the operation is performed in the
reverse rotation direction. For this check, set the other inputs as follows:
Input signal

Status

X010

X011

X012

OFF

1) LED indicator lamp check
Check the LED indicator lamps of the PLC or the display module to check whether the outputs are turned
on. The status of each output should be as shown in the following table:

If transistor outputs of the
main unit are used

If high-speed output
special adapter is used

Pulse output
method

LED lamp
of output

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y000
Y004

Kept OFF.

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y0/2

Turned on and off at high speed.

Y4/6

Kept OFF.

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)
Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

Y0/2

Kept OFF.

Y4/6

Turned on and off at high speed.

Status of LED lamp (output)
Turned on and off at high speed.

2) Current value register (D8341, D8340) check
Monitor the current value register (D8341, D8340) of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC using the programming
tool, and confirm that the value is being reduced.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

B - 84

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

5.1 Test Procedure

Turn off the reverse rotation (JOG-) switch (X013) to stop the operation in the reverse rotation direction.
1) LED indicator lamp check
Check the LED indicator lamps of the PLC or the display module to check whether or not the outputs are
turned on. The status of each output should be as shown in the following table:

If transistor outputs of main "Pulse train + direcunit are used
tion" method

Status of LED lamp (output)

Y000

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

Y004

Kept OFF.

"Pulse train + direction" method

Y0/2

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

Y4/6

Kept OFF.

Forward rotation
pulse train (FP)
Reverse rotation
pulse train (RP)

Y0/2

Kept OFF.

Y4/6

The LED indicator lamp (turned on and
off at high speed) will be turned off.

2) Current value register (D8341, D8340) check
Monitor the current value register (D8341, D8340) of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC using the programming
tool, and confirm that the value is not being decreased.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

11 Check the operation of the reverse rotation limit switch.
During operation in the reverse rotation direction (at step 10), turn off the reverse rotation limit
switch 1 (X011), and confirm that the operation in the reverse rotation direction is stopped.
The LED indicator lamps and the current value register (D8341, D8340) will enter the same
statuses as the stop statuses described in step 10.
In addition, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will turn on.
→ For details on the current value register, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.

B - 85

Apx.
Example
Connection

If high-speed output
special adapter is used

LED lamp
of output

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Pulse output
method

Common Items

2. Stop of operation

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

5.2

5.2 Creation of Test Program

Creation of Test Program
1. Input/output assignment
Inputs/outputs are assigned as shown in the following table:
Signal
Limit switch
Manual switch

Forward rotation limit 1

Input/output number
NC contact

X010

Reverse rotation limit 1

NC contact

X011

Forward rotation (JOG+)

NO contact

X012

Reverse rotation (JOG-)

NO contact

X013

"Pulse train" signal or "forward rotation pulse train" signal (output specified for pulse output
destination)

Y000

"Direction" signal or "reverse rotation pulse train" signal (output specified for rotation
direction signal)

Y004

2. Setting of related devices
The following related devices depend on the pulse output destination device that is set for the positioning
instruction. If the pulse output destination device is changed, it is necessary to change the related devices.
→ For setting items of the related devices, refer to Subsection 4.5.1.
Setting item

Description of setting

Related
device

Setting value or
condition

Items related to speed
Maximum speed

100,000Hz

D8344,D8343
(32-bit)

K100000 Initial value

Bias speed

0Hz

D8342

K0 Initial value

Acceleration time

100ms

D8348

K100 Initial value

Deceleration time

100ms

D8349

Forward/reverse rotation speed

30,000Hz

K100 Initial value
-

K30000

Forward limit, reverse limit, and immediate stop of pulse output
Forward limit

If X010 is turned off (if the NC contact is
turned on), the limit switch will be
M8343
activated.

ON: If X010 = OFF

Reverse limit

If X011 is turned off (if the NC contact is
turned on), the limit switch will be
M8344
activated.

ON: If X011 = OFF

Use this device to check whether the
positioning instruction is being
activated.

M8348

Turns on when the
positioning instruction is
activated.

Use this device to check whether or not
"Instruction execution abnormal
the forward/reverse rotation limit switch M8329
end" flag
turns ON.

Turns on when the limit
switch is activated
during a positioning
operation.

Status check items
Positioning (Y000)

Current value register (Y000)

B - 86

Stores the current value of the
positioning operation in Y000.

D8341,D8340 Varies when a positioning
(32-bit)
instruction tuns ON.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

5 Operation Test

Built-in Positioning Functions

5.2 Creation of Test Program

M8002

FNC 12
DMOV

Initial pulse

K100000 D8343

Maximum speed (for Y000)
100,000Hz→[D8344,D8343]

FNC 12
MOV

D8342

Bias speed (for Y000)
0Hz→D8342

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8348

Acceleration time (for Y000)
100ms→D8348

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8349

Deceleration time (for Y000)
100ms→D8349

M8343

Forward limit (for Y000)

M8344

Reverse limit (for Y000)

Y004

Performs jogging operation
in the forward rotation direction
using the drive to Increment
instruction.

M101

Completes the JOG+ operation.

M100

JOG+ operation is being performed.

Y004

Performs jogging operation in the
reverse rotation direction using the
drive to Increment instruction.

M103

Completes the JOG- operation.

M102

JOG- operation is being performed.

Apx.
Example
Connection

Forward rotation limit 1

X011
Reverse rotation limit 1

X012

M8348

M101

JOG+ Positioning JOG(+)
(Y000)

operation
completed

FNC158 K999999 K30000
DDRVI
X012

M100

JOG+

JOG(+)
operation
being
performed

M8329

X013

M8348

JOG- Positioning
(Y000)

M102
JOG(-)
operation
being
performed

Y000

Instruction execution
abnormal completion

M103
JOG(-)
operation
completed

FNC158 K-999999 K30000
DDRVI
X013

Y000

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

X010

Common Items

3. Example program

JOG-

M8329
Instruction execution
abnormal completion

END

B - 87

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6.
6.1

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.1 Types of Mechanical Zero Return Instructions

Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
Types of Mechanical Zero Return Instructions
If forward rotation pulses or reverse rotation pulses are being output, the positioning instruction of the PLC will
increase or decrease the current value of the current value register.
When turning off the power of the PLC, however, the current value stored in the current value register will be
erased. For this reason, after turning on the power again, be sure to adjust the current value of the current
value register to the current position of the machine.
The built-in positioning function uses the DSZR/ZRN instruction (zero return instruction) to adjust the value of
the current value register to the current mechanical position.
Compared with the ZRN instruction, the DSZR instruction has additional functionality.
DOG search function
DOG signal logical NOT
Zero return using zero-phase signal
Zero point signal logic reverse

DSZR instruction

ZRN instruction

3
3
3
3

Absolute position detection system:
If the MR-H, MR-J2, MR-J2S, or MR-J3 servo amplifier (with absolute position detection function)
manufactured by Mitsubishi is used, the current position value will be retained even after power-off.
To use the absolute position detection system, zero return is required to be performed only once. The PLC
can then read the current position value of the servo motor with the FNC155 (DABS) instruction. With this
method, it is not necessary to perform zero return every time after power-on.

B - 88

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)
Use this instruction to change the CLEAR signal output destination with an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later
or an FX3G PLC.

6.2.1

Instruction Format

16-bit
instruction

ZERO RETURN
WITH DOG
SEARCH

9 steps

S1•

S2•

Instruction Execution condition
symbol

Continuous
execution
type

DSZR
-

FNC 150
DSZR

32-bit
instruction

Instruction Execution condition
symbol

D1•

Apx.

Example
Connection

FNC 150
DSZR

D2•

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type

Specifies the near-point signal (DOG) input device number.

Specifies the zero-phase signal input number.

Specifies the pulse output number.

Specifies the rotation direction signal output destination number.

Bit

3. Devices
Bit device

Operand
type

System user

Digit designation

Word device

Others

System user

Real CharConnum- acter Pointer
stant
ber string

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T
S1

3 3 3

Special unit

Index

R U\G V Z Modify K H

3
3

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1. Instruction format

Command
input

Common Items

6.2

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

1 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
2 : Specify a device in the range of X000 to X007.
3 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 of a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

Note:
• To use an FX3U Series main unit of relay output type, be sure to connect a high-speed output special
adapter. Differential line drive type outputs will be used for the outputs of the high-speed output special
adapter.

B - 89

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

4 : When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC,
use the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.
→ For the outputs applicable with a High-speed output special adapter, refer to Section 4.9.
High-speed output special
adapter connection position
1st adapter

2nd adapter

6.2.2

Pulse output

Rotation direction output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

List of Related devices
1. Special auxiliary relays
The following table shows the related special auxiliary relays. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000

B - 90

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.3

M8341

M8351

M8361

M8371

CLEAR signal output function enable*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.4

M8342

M8352

M8362

M8372

Zero return direction specification*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.3

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8345

M8355

M8365

M8375

DOG signal logic reverse*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.5

M8346

M8356

M8366

M8376

Zero point signal logic reverse*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.6

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379

Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

M8464

M8465

M8466

M8467

CLEAR signal device specification function
enabled*3, *4

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.4

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

*4.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

The following table shows the related special data registers. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000
Loworder

D8350

Loworder

Y002
D8360

Loworder

Y003
D8370

Loworder

HighD8351
order

HighD8361
order

HighD8371
order

D8342

D8352

D8362

D8372

LowD8343
order

LowD8353
order

LowD8363
order

LowD8373
order

HighD8344
order

HighD8354
order

HighD8364
order

HighD8374
order

D8345

D8355

D8365

D8375

D8347

Loworder

D8356

Highorder

D8357

Loworder

D8366

Highorder

D8367

Loworder

D8376

Highorder

D8377

Loworder
Highorder

Data
length

Initial
value

Refer to

Current value
32-bit
register (PLS)

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed
(Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum
speed (Hz)

32-bit 100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

Creep speed
(Hz)

16-bit

1000

Subsection
4.2.4

Zero return
speed (Hz)

32-bit

50,000

Subsection
4.2.3

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration
time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration
time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

D8464

D8465

D8466

D8467

CLEAR signal
device
specification

16-bit

Subsection
4.3.4

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

B - 91

Apx.
Example
Connection

HighD8341
order

D8346

Function

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

D8340

Y001

Common Items

2. Special data registers

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2.3

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

Function and Operation
Command
input

FNC 150
DSZR

S1•

S2•

D1•

D2•

→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, and deceleration time, refer to
Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8.
Deceleration
time

Acceleration
time

Initial value:
100 ms

Initial value:
100ms
Maximum speed
Initial value: 100,000Hz

Zero return speed
Initial value: 50,000Hz
Current value register = "0"
Creep speed
Initial value:
1,000Hz

Bias speed
Initial value: 0Hz

DOG
Zero-phase signal
(X000 - X007)
S2•

Rear end

S1•
Front end

1 ms or less

CLEAR signal

20 ms + 1 scan time (ms)

1) For S1 , specify the near-point signal (DOG) input device number. To specify the logic of this nearpoint signal (DOG), turn the "DOG signal logic reverse" relay on or off as shown in the following table.
Pulse output
destination device

"DOG signal logic
reverse" relay

= Y000

M8345

= Y001

M8355

= Y002

M8365

= Y003

M8375

Description
OFF: Positive logic (Turning on the input will turn on the
near-point signal.)
ON:
Negative logic (Turning off the input will turn on the
near-point signal.)

• When an input (X000 to X017)*1 from the main unit is used for the near-point signal (DOG)
S1 , the rear end of the near-point signal (DOG) will be monitored (detected) at 1-ms intervals
(interruption).
Under the following condition, however, monitoring (detection) of the near-point signal (DOG) rear end
will be affected by the input constant or the scan time of the sequence program:
- An input number of X020 or below (or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.)) is specified.
*1. Specify X000 to X007 for FX3U-16M, FX3UC-16M.
Specify X000 to X007 for FX3G PLC (main unit).

B - 92

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

= Y000

M8346

= Y001

M8356

= Y002

M8366

= Y003

M8376

OFF: Positive logic (Turning on the input will turn on the
near-point signal.)
ON:
Negative logic (Turning off the input will turn on the
near-point signal.)

Apx.

, specify a pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.

4) For D2 , specify the rotation direction signal output device number.
When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC, use
the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.
High-speed output special
adapter connection position

Pulse output

1st adapter

2nd adapter

Rotation direction
output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

The rotation direction ON/OFF status of the specified device is shown in the following table.
During instruction execution, however, do not use the output D2 for other purposes.
ON/OFF status of device
specified by D2

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)

Forward rotation (Outputting pulses from D1
current value.)

will increase the

OFF

Reverse rotation (Outputting pulses from D1
current value.)

will decrease the

5) Zero return direction
To specify the zero return direction, turn "zero return direction specification" relay on or off as shown in
the following table.
Pulse output
destination device

"Zero return direction
specification" relay

= Y000

M8342

= Y001

M8352

= Y002

M8362

= Y003

M8372

Description
To perform zero return in the
forward rotation direction:
To perform zero return in the
reverse rotation direction:

Turn on the relay.
Turn off the relay.

B - 93

Example
Connection

3) For

Description

"Zero point signal logic
reverse" flag

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Pulse output
destination device

Common Items

2) For S2 , specify the zero-phase signal input number in the range of X000 to X007. To specify the logic
of this zero-phase signal, turn the "Zero point signal logic reverse" relay on or off as shown in the
following table.
If the same input is specified for both the near-point signal and the zero-phase signal, the logic of the zerophase signal will be specified by the device of the near-point signal (DOG), and not by one of the following
devices. In this case, the operation will be performed at the front and rear ends of the near-point signal
(DOG) without using the zero-phase signal. This is similar to the operation of the ZRN instruction.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

6) CLEAR signal output
This instruction can output the CLEAR signal after stopping at the origin.
If it is necessary to output the CLEAR signal at the completion of zero return, turn on the "CLEAR signal
output function enable" relay (see the following table).
Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to specify the CLEAR signal output device.
a) If it is not necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification function, or if an FX3UC PLC below
Ver.2.20 is used.
Pulse output
destination device

*1.

Status of "CLEAR
signal output function
enable" relay

Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification function
enable" relay*1

CLEAR signal device
number

= Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=OFF

Y004

= Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=OFF

Y005

= Y002

M8361=ON

M8466=OFF

Y006

= Y003

M8371=ON

M8467=OFF

Y007

Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to use the "CLEAR signal device specification function
enable" relay.

b) If it is necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification
function:
Turn on the "CLEAR signal device specification function enable"
relay to specify the CLEAR signal output device (output Y) for the pulse output destination device
using the CLEAR signal device specification register.
→ For an example program, refer to Subsection 4.3.4 or Subsection 4.5.1.
Pulse output
destination device

Status of "CLEAR
signal output function
enable" relay

Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification function
enable" relay*1

CLEAR signal device
specification register

= Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=ON

D 8464

= Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=ON

D 8465

= Y002

M8361=ON

M8466=ON

D 8466

= Y003

M8371=ON

M8467=ON

D 8467

7) Zero return speed
Use the devices shown in the following table to set the zero return speed. Be sure to set the zero return
speed so that the relation with the other speeds is "bias speed ≤ zero return speed ≤ maximum speed".
- If "zero return speed > maximum speed", the operation will be performed at the maximum speed.
Pulse output
destination device

Bias speed

Zero return speed

Maximum speed

= Y000

D8342

D8347,D8346

D8344,D8343

= Y001

D8352

D8357,D8356

D8354,D8353

= Y002

D8362

D8367,D8366

D8364,D8363

= Y003

D8372

D8377,D8376

D8374,D8373

Initial value

50,000(Hz)

8) Creep speed
Use the devices shown in the following table to set the creep speed. Be sure to set the creep speed so
that the relation with the other speeds is "bias speed ≤ creep speed ≤ maximum speed".
Pulse output
destination device

B - 94

Bias speed

Creep speed

Maximum speed

= Y000

D8342

D8345

D8344,D8343

= Y001

D8352

D8355

D8354,D8353

= Y002

D8362

D8365

D8364,D8363

= Y003

D8372

D8375

D8374,D8373

Initial value

1,000(Hz)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

Zero return operation is described below assuming that Y000 is specified as the pulse output destination
device D1 . If Y001, Y002, or Y003 is specified, it is necessary to change the output number of each related
relay (special auxiliary relay, special data register) below.
→ For details on related relays, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4, or Subsection 6.2.2.

2) Execute the DSZR instruction to perform zero return.
3) Transfer operation will be performed in the direction specified by the "zero return direction designation"
flag (M8342) at the speed specified by the "zero return speed designation" device (D8347, D8346).
is turned on*1, the speed will be reduced to the creep

5) After turning the near-point signal (DOG) S1 OFF*1, if the zero-phase signal specified by S2 is
turned on*2, the pulse outputting operation will immediately stop.
If the same input is specified for both the near-point signal and the zero-phase signal, turning the nearpoint signal (DOG) OFF*1 will immediately stop the pulse outputting operation (just like the ZRN
instruction where the zero-phase signal is not used).
6) If the CLEAR signal output function (M8341) is enabled (set to ON), the CLEAR signal (Y004) will be
turned on within 1 ms after stopping the pulse outputting operation, and will be kept ON for "20 ms + 1
scan time (ms)".
7) The current value register (D8341, D8340) will be reset to "0" (will be cleared).
8) The "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will turn on, and the zero return operation will be
completed.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution complete" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
Acceleration
time
(D8348)

Deceleration
time
(D8349)
Maximum speed
(D8344,D8343)

Current value register = "0"

Zero return speed
(D8347,D8346)

Creep speed
(D8345)

(D8341,D8340)

Bias speed
(D8342)
DOG

Zero-phase signal
S2•
CLEAR signal
(Y004)
"Instruction
execution
complete"
flag M8029

Zero return
direction
M8342=OFF

Rear end

S1•
Front end

1 ms or less
20 ms + 1 scan time (ms)
ON
When the instruction is turned off, M8029 is turned off.

*1.

This step is described assuming that the "DOG signal logic reverse" relay (M8345) is off. If this flag is
on, it is necessary to change the expression "on" to "off", and "off" to "on".

*2.

This step is described assuming that the "Zero point signal logic reverse" relay (M8346) is off. If this
flag is on, it is necessary to change the expression "on" to "off", and "off" to "on".

B - 95

Apx.
Example
Connection

4) If the near-point signal (DOG) specified by S1
speed (D8345).

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1) Specify the zero return direction.
Turn the "zero return direction specification" relay (M8342) on or off to specify the zero return direction.

Common Items

1. Zero return operation

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

2. DOG search function
If the forward rotation limit and the reverse rotation limit are set, the DOG search function can be used for
zero return. The zero return operation depends on the zero return start position.
Rear end

Reverse rotation
limit 1
Reverse rotation limit

Front end
DOG

Zero return
direction

Forward rotation
limit 1
Forward rotation limit
Operation in
reverse rotation
direction

Origin
Operation in
forward rotation
direction

1) If the start position is before the DOG:
a) When the zero return instruction is executed, zero return will be started.
b) Transfer operation will be started in the zero return direction at the zero return speed.
c) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will be reduced to the creep speed.
d) After detecting the rear end of the DOG, if the first zero-phase signal is detected, the operation will be
stopped.
2) If the start position is in the DOG area:
a) When the zero return instruction is executed, zero return will be started.
b) Transfer operation will be started in the opposite direction of the zero return direction at the zero return
speed.
c) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will decelerate and the operation will stop. (The
workpiece will come out of the DOG area.)
d) Transfer operation will be restarted in the zero return direction at the zero return speed (and the
workpiece will enter the DOG area again).
e) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will be reduced to the creep speed.
f) After detecting the rear end of the DOG, if the first zero-phase signal is detected, the operation will be
stopped.
3) If the start position is in the near-point signal OFF area (after the DOG):
a) When the zero return instruction is executed, zero return will be started.
b) Transfer operation will be started in the zero return direction at the zero return speed.
c) If the reverse rotation limit 1 (reverse rotation limit) is detected, the speed will decelerate, and the
operation will stop.
d) Transfer operation will be started in the opposite direction of the zero return direction at the zero return
speed.
e) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will be reduced and the operation will be stopped.
(The workpiece will detect the DOG and then come out of the DOG area.)
f) Transfer operation will be restarted in the zero return direction at the zero return speed. (The
workpiece will enter the DOG area again.)
g) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will be reduced to the creep speed.
h) After detecting the rear end of the DOG, if the first zero-phase signal is detected, the operation will be
stopped.

B - 96

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

A
Common Items

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

4) If the limit switch in the zero return direction turns ON (if the start position is at forward rotation limit 1 or
reverse rotation limit 1):
a) When the zero return instruction is executed, zero return will be started.
b) Transfer operation will be started in the opposite direction of the zero return direction at the zero return
speed.
c) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will decelerate and the operation will stop. (The
workpiece will detect the DOG and then come out of the DOG area.)
d) Transfer operation will be restarted in the zero return direction at the zero return speed (and the
workpiece will enter the DOG area again).
e) If the front end of the DOG is detected, the speed will be reduced to the creep speed.
f) After detecting the rear end of the DOG, if the first zero-phase signal is detected, the operation will be
stopped.

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 97

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6.2.4

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

Important Points
→ For important programming points, refer to Section 4.7.
• If an input (X000 to X017)*1 from the main unit is used for the near-point signal (DOG) S1 , the rear end
of the near-point signal (DOG) will be monitored (detected) at 1ms intervals (interruption).
Under the following condition, however, monitoring (detection) of the near-point signal (DOG) rear end will
be affected by the input time constant or the scan time of the sequence program:
- An input number of X020 or below or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.) is specified.
*1.

Specify X000 to X007 for FX3U-16M, FX3UC-16M.
Specify X000 to X007 for FX3G PLC (main unit).

• Properly set the DOG so that the near-point signal (DOG) can be kept at the ON status until the speed is
reduced to the creep speed.
This instruction will start speed reduction at the front end of the DOG, and will stop the operation at the rear
end of the DOG or at detection of the first zero-phase signal after passing the rear end of the DOG.
The current value register will then be cleared (reset to "0").
If the speed is not reduced to the creep speed before detecting the rear end of the DOG, the operation may
not be stopped at the specified position.
• Use the near-point signal (DOG) between the reverse rotation limit 1 (LSR) and the forward rotation limit 1
(LSF).
The intended operation may not be performed if the relationship among the near-point signal (DOG),
reverse rotation limit 1 (LSR) and forward rotation limit 1 (LSF) is not as shown in the figure below.
Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

DOG

Servo motor

Reverse rotation

• The input device specified for the near-point signal S1
for the following items:
- High-speed counter
- Input interruption
- Pulse catch
- SPD instruction

Forward rotation

or the zero-phase signal S2

cannot be used

- DVIT instruction*2
- ZRN instruction
*2.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

• Since the zero-phase signal of the servo motor is used, adjust the relation between the rear end of the
DOG and the zero-phase signal as shown in the following figure. If fine adjustment of the origin position is
needed, adjust the position of the near-point signal (DOG).
Rear end
DOG
Zero-phase signal

• The creep speed should be slow enough.
The zero return instruction will not decelerate at the stop point. Therefore, if the creep speed is not slow
enough, the operation may not stop at the specified position due to inertia.
• If an operand is changed during instruction execution, the change will be ignored and the operation will not
be affected. To change the operation, turn off the command contact of the instruction, and then turn it on
again.
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during the zero return operation, the speed will decelerate
and the operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will not be
turned on.

B - 98

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.2 DOG Search Zero Return (DSZR Instruction)

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

• In the following case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on, and the
execution of the instruction will be completed.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
- If the DOG search function cannot detect the near-point signal (DOG), the speed will decelerate and the
operation will stop.
In this case, "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on, and the execution of
the instruction will be completed.

A
Common Items

• If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 99

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)
Use this instruction to change the CLEAR signal output destination with an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later
or an FX3G PLC.

6.3.1

Instruction Format
1. Instruction Format
FNC 156
ZRN

16-bit
instruction

ZERO RETURN

9 steps

Command
input

Continuous
execution
type

ZRN
-

FNC156
ZRN

S1•

32-bit
instruction

Instruction Execution condition
symbol

S2•

S3•

17 steps

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
DZRN
execution
type

D•

2. Data setting
Operand type

*1.

Description

Data type

speed.*1

Specifies the zero return

Specifies the creep speed. (Setting range: 10 to 32,767 Hz)

Specifies an input number for the near-point signal(DOG).

Specifies the pulse output number.

BIN16/32-bit

Bit

Setting range : 10 to 32,767 Hz for 16-bit operation
For 32-bit operation, however, the setting range should be as shown in the following
table.
Pulse output destination

Setting range

FX3U PLC

High-speed output special adapter

10 to 200,000(Hz)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Main unit (transistor output)

10 to 100,000(Hz)

3. Devices
Bit device

Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System user

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T

Others
Special
unit

Index

Real CharConnum- acter Pointer
stant ber string

C D R U\G V Z Modify K H

3 3 3 3

3 3

3 3 3 3

3 3

3 3 3

" "

3
3

1 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
2 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 of a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.
3 : Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

B - 100

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

Y001

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8350

M8360

M8370 "Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag

Read only

M8341

M8351

M8361

M8371 CLEAR signal output function enable*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.4

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373 Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374 Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378 Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379 Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

M8464

M8465

M8466

M8467

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.4

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

CLEAR signal device specification function
enable*3, *4

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX3U
PLC.
Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

2. Special data registers
The following table shows the related special data registers. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000
D8340

Loworder

HighD8341
order
D8342
D8343

Loworder

HighD8344
order

*1.
*2.
*3.

Y001
D8350

Loworder

HighD8351
order
D8352
D8353

Loworder

HighD8354
order

Y002*1
D8360

Loworder

HighD8361
order
D8362
D8363

Loworder

HighD8364
order

Y003*2
D8370

Loworder

HighD8371
order
D8372
D8373

Loworder

HighD8374
order

Function

Data
length

Initial
value

Current value
register (PLS)

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed
(Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum
speed (Hz)

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

Refer to

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration
time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration
time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

D8464

D8465

D8466

D8467

CLEAR signal
device
specification*3

16-bit

Subsection
4.3.4

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the
FX3U PLC.
Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

B - 101

Apx.
Example
Connection

M8340

Subsection
4.4.3

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Y000

Function

Common Items

6.3.2

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3.3

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

Function and operation
Command
input

FNC156
ZRN

S1•

S2•

S3•

D•

→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time and deceleration time, refer to
Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8.
Acceleration
time

Deceleration
time

Maximum speed

Creep speed

Zero return speed
S1•

S2•

Bias speed
S3•

DOG
Rear end

CLEAR signal
"Instruction
execution
complete" flag
M8029

Front end

1 ms or less
20 ms + 1 scan time (ms)

When the instruction is turned off, M8029 is turned off.

For S1 , specify the zero return speed.
If the set zero return speed value is more than the maximum speed value, the operation will be performed
at the maximum speed.
Setting range
16-bit operation

32-bit operation

10 to 32,767(Hz)

When a high-speed output special
adapter is used

10 to 200,000(Hz)

When a transistor output from the
main unit is used

10 to 100,000(Hz)

Note that the zero return speeds shown in the following table will not apply.
Pulse output destination device
D1

= Y000

D8347,D8346

= Y001

D8357,D8356

= Y002

D8367,D8366

= Y003

D8377,D8376

2) For S2 , specify the creep speed.
Setting range: 10 to 32,767 Hz

B - 102

Zero return speed

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

, specify a pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.

5) Zero return direction
For this instruction, the zero return direction is set to the reverse rotation direction.
(During zero return operation, the value indicated in the current value register will be decreased.)
To perform zero return in the forward rotation direction*1, follow the example program below to control the
direction output.
→ For programming details, refer to Section 4.7.
→ To use the main unit (transistor output), refer to Section 4.8.
→ To use a high-speed output special adapter, refer to Section 4.9.
a) Turn on Y (rotational direction signal).
b) Refresh Y output using the REF (FNC50) instruction.
c) Execute the ZRN instruction (zero return instruction).
d) With the execution completion flag (M8029) of the ZRN instruction (zero return instruction), reset
Y (rotational direction signal).
Example program:
In the program shown below, Y004 is specified as the rotation direction signal output device for Y000.
Command
input

RST

M10

RST

M11

SET

Y004

Y000

S3•

Y000

M8340
Y000 output
pulse monitor

FNC 50
REFP
FNC156
DZRN
M8029

M8329

*1.

a) Turns on (sets) Y004 as the
rotational direction signal of Y000
(pulse output destination).
b) Refreshes Y000 to Y007.
c) Executes ZRN instruction.

S1•

S2•

RST

Y004

d) Resets the rotational direction
signal (Y004) using the instruction
execution complete flag.

SET

M10

Origin data reading completion flag

RST

Y004

Resets the rotational direction signal
(Y004) using the instruction
execution abnormal end flag.

SET

M11

Abnormal end of zero return

The pulses being output will always decrease the current value.

B - 103

Apx.
Example
Connection

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

4) For

Common Items

3) For S3 , specify the near-point signal (DOG) input device number ( NO contact).
Turning on the near-point signal will reduce the speed to the creep speed. Turning off the near-point
signal will complete the zero return operation.
→ For details, refer to "1. Zero return operation".
• If an input (X000 to X007) of the main unit is specified for the input signal, the PLC interruption function
will be used to stop the operation. (To output the CLEAR signal, turn on the "CLEAR signal output
function enable" relay.)
Under the following condition, however, operation may be affected by the input constant or the scan
time of the sequence program, and the operation, therefore, may not be stopped exactly at the origin.
-An input number of X010 or below (or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.)) is specified.
• If an input relay X010 or higher is specified for the near-point signal, the input filter (10 ms) will be
applied.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

6) CLEAR signal output
This instruction can output the CLEAR signal after stopping at the origin. If it is necessary to output the
CLEAR signal at the completion of zero return, turn on the "CLEAR signal output function enable" relay
(see the following table). Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to specify the CLEAR
signal output device.
a) If it is not necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification function, or if an FX3UC PLC of
below Ver.2.20 is used:
Pulse output
destination device

Status of "CLEAR
signal output function
enable" relay

Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification
function enable" relay*1

CLEAR signal device
number

= Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=OFF

Y004

= Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=OFF

Y005

= Y002

M8361=ON

M8466=OFF

Y006

= Y003

M8371=ON

M8467=OFF

Y007

*1. Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC to use the "CLEAR signal device specification function
enable" relay.

b) If it is necessary to use the CLEAR signal device specification
function:
Turn on the "CLEAR signal device specification function enable"
relay to specify the CLEAR signal output device (output Y) for the
pulse output destination device using the CLEAR signal device specification register.
→ For the example of a program, refer to Subsection 4.3.4 or Subsection 4.5.1.
Pulse output
destination device

B - 104

Status of "CLEAR
signal output function
enable" relay

Status of "CLEAR signal
device specification
function enable" relay

CLEAR signal device
specification register

= Y000

M8341=ON

M8464=ON

D 8464

= Y001

M8351=ON

M8465=ON

D 8465

= Y002

M8361=ON

M8466=ON

D 8466

= Y003

M8371=ON

M8467=ON

D 8467

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

Zero return operation is described below assuming that Y000 is specified as the pulse output destination
device D . If Y001, Y002, and Y003 are specified, it is necessary to change the output number of each
related relay (special auxiliary relay, special data register) below.
→ For details on related flags, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4, or Subsection 6.2.2.
1) Execute the ZRN instruction to carry out zero return.

is turned on, the speed will be reduced to the creep

4) If the near-point signal (DOG) specified by S3
immediately stopped.

is turned off, the pulse outputting operation will be

5) If the CLEAR signal output function (M8341) is enabled (set to ON), the CLEAR signal (Y004) will be
turned on within 1 ms after stopping the pulse outputting operation, and will be kept ON for "20 ms + 1
scan time (ms)".
6) The current value register (D8341, D8340) will be reset to "0" (will be cleared).
7) "Instruction execution complete" flag will be turned on, and the zero return operation will be completed.
→ For details on "Instruction execution complete" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
Deceleration
time
(D8349)

Acceleration
time
(D8348)
Maximum speed
(D8344,D8343)

Creep speed

Zero return speed*1
S1•

S2•

Bias speed
(D8342)
S3•

DOG
Rear end

CLEAR signal
Y004
"Instruction
execution
complete" flag
M8029

Front end

1 ms or less
20 ms + 1scan time (ms)
ON
When the instruction is turned off, M8029 is turned off.

*1.

Note that the zero return speeds shown in the following table will not apply.
Pulse output destination device

Zero return speed

= Y000

D8347,D8346

= Y001

D8357,D8356

= Y002

D8367,D8366

= Y003

D8377,D8376

B - 105

Apx.
Example
Connection

3) If the near-point signal (DOG) specified by S3
speed specified by S2 .

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

2) Transfer operation will be performed at the zero return speed specified by S1 .

Common Items

1. Zero return operation

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

6.3.4

6 Mechanical Zero Return (DSZR/ZRN Instruction)
6.3 Zero Return (ZRN Instruction)

Important Points
→ For important programming points, refer to Section 4.7.
• If an input (X000 to X007) of the main unit is specified for the near-point input signal specified by S3 , the
PLC interruption function will be used to stop the operation.
Under the following condition, however, operation may be affected by the input constant or the scan time of
the sequence program.
- An input number of X010 or below (or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.)) is specified.
If input relay X010 or higher is specified for the near-point signal, the input filter (10 ms) will be applied.
• If an input (X000 to X007) is specified for the near-point signal S3 , the input cannot be used for the
following items:
- High-speed counter
- Input interruption
- Pulse catch
- SPD instruction
- DSZR instruction
- DVIT instruction*1
• Properly set the DOG so that the near-point signal (DOG) can be kept ON until the speed is reduced to the
creep speed.
This instruction will start speed reduction at the front end of the DOG, and will stop the operation at the rear
end of the DOG. The current value register will then be cleared (reset to "0").
If the speed is not reduced to the creep speed before detecting the rear end of the DOG, the operation may
not be stopped at the specified position.
• The creep speed should be slow enough.
The zero return instruction will not decelerate at the stop point. Therefore, if the creep speed is not slow
enough, the operation may not stop at the specified position due to inertia.
• The DOG search function does not apply for this instruction. Therefore, start the zero return operation on
the front side of the near-point signal. If it is necessary to use the DOG search function, use the DSZR
instruction.
• The zero-phase signal of the servo motor cannot be used. For this reason, if fine adjustment of the origin
position is needed, adjust the position of the near-point signal (DOG).
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during zero return operation, the speed will decelerate and
the operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will not turn on.
• While the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.
• In the following case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on, and
execution of the instruction will be completed.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
- If the forward limit relay or the reverse limit relay is turned on, the speed will decelerate and the
operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on
when execution of the instruction is complete.
- If the limit relay (forward limit relay or reverse limit relay) on the opposite side of the operation direction
is turned on, the speed will decelerate and the operation will stop.
In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on when execution of
the instruction is complete.
*1.

B - 106

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

7 Absolute Position Detection System (Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS

Built-in Positioning Functions

7.1 Instruction Format

A
Common Items

Absolute Position Detection System
(Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS Instruction

Instruction Format
1. Instruction Format
D

16-bit
Instruction Execution condition
instruction symbol

FNC 155
ABS

−

ABSOLUTE

Command
input

−

FNC 155
DABS

D1•

S•

32-bit
Instruction Execution condition
instruction
symbol
Continuous
13 steps DABS
execution
−
type

D2•

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type

Specifies the first number of the device that inputs the absolute position (ABS) data

from the servo amplifier. Number of occupied points: 3 (first point for

)

Specifies the first number of the device that outputs the absolute position (ABS) data

BIN16-bit

control signal to the servo amplifier. Number of occupied points: 3 (first point for D1 )
Specifies the absolute position (ABS) data (32-bit value) storage device number.

BIN32-bit

3. Devices
Bit device
Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System user

Others
Special
unit

Real CharConnum- acter Pointer
stant
ber string

Index

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U/G V Z Modify K H
S
D1

3 3 3

3 3

3
3

3 3 3 3

3 3

1 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
2 : Only available for to FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

B - 107

Apx.
Example
Connection

7.1

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

With the use of the servo absolute position detection system, the built-in positioning function uses the current
ABS value read-out (ABS) instruction to read out the current value (absolute position (ABS) data) from the
MELSERVO-H, -J2(S), or -J3 servo amplifier.
→ For items to be observed in programming, refer to Section 4.7.
→ For the servo amplifier and connection of the MELSERVO Series, refer to the Appendix and the
examples of connection.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

7 Absolute Position Detection System (Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

7.2

7.2 List of Related Devices

List of Related Devices
→ For details on the related devices, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4.

1. Special auxiliary relays
The following table shows the related special auxiliary relays.
Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
→ For details on PLSY (FNC57), PWM (FNC58), and PLSR (FNC59) instructions, refer to the
programming manual.
Device number
Y000

*1.
*2.

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

7.3

Y002*1

Y001

D8340

Loworder

D8350

D8341

Highorder

HighD8351
order

Loworder

D8360

Loworder

D8361

Highorder

Y003*2
D8370

Loworder

D8371

Highorder

Function
Current
value
register
(PLS)

Data
length

32-bit

Initial
value

Refer to

Subsection
4.4.1

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

Function and Operation
Connect an MR-H, MR-J2(S), or MR-J3 servo motor (with absolute position detection function) manufactured
by Mitsubishi to your system, and use this instruction to read out the absolute position (ABS) data. The data
will be converted into a pulse value before being read out.
Command
input

FNC 155
DABS

S•

D1•

D2•

1) For S , specify the first number of the device that inputs the absolute position (ABS) data from the
servo amplifier. Number of occupied points: 3 ( S , S +1, S +2)
2) For D1 , specify the first number of the device that outputs the absolute position (ABS) data control
signal to the servo amplifier. Be sure to use transistor outputs for the PLC outputs.
Number of occupied points: 3 ( D1 , D1 +1, D1 +2)
3) For D2 , specify the absolute position (ABS) data (32-bit value) storage device number to store the
data read out from the servo amplifier. Handle the absolute position (ABS) data as follows:
- To use the built-in pulse output function, be sure to specify the following current value registers for the
read-out ABS data:

B - 108

Y000

Y001

Y002*1

Y003*2

D8341,D8340

D8351,D8350

D8361,D8360

D8371, D8370

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

7 Absolute Position Detection System (Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS

Built-in Positioning Functions

7.4 Initial Zero Return

1. Detection of absolute position

2) 32+6-bit data communication will be performed
while mutually checking the data sending/
receiving condition using the "send data ready"
signal and the "ABS data request" signal.

4) At the completion of ABS data reading, the
"Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029)
will turn on.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution
complete" flag, refer to
Subsection 4.7.4.

7.4

SON

ABS data transfer
mode
"Send data ready"
signal
"ABS data request"
signal
ABS(bit 1)

ABSM

ABS(bit 0)

TLC

Amplifier output

ABSR

PLC output

ZSP

Amplifier output

DO1

Amplifier output

Current position data (32 bits)
+ check data (6 bits)

Initial Zero Return
When your system is established, even if your servo motor is equipped with an absolute position detection
function, it is necessary to perform zero return at least once to send the CLEAR signal to the servo motor.
Use one of the following methods for the initial zero return:
1) Execute DSZR (FNC150) with DOG search zero return instruction or ZRN (FNC156) zero return
instruction using the CLEAR signal function to complete zero return.
2) Carry out zero return for the machine using the position adjustment method in the jogging operation mode
or manual operation mode, and then input the CLEAR signal.
To input the CLEAR signal, use the output of the PLC or the external switch shown in the following figure.
Example for MR-J2-A

CLEAR
signal

SG 10

B - 109

Apx.
Example
Connection

3) The 2-bit line (line for ABS bit 0 and bit 1) will be
used for data transmission.

Servo-ON

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1) If the DABS (FNC155) instruction turns ON, the
PLC will activate the servo-ON output and the
ABS transfer mode output.

A
Common Items

- When using the FX2N-1PG(-E) or FX2N-10PG, read out the ABS data from the data register first, and
then write the read-out ABS data into the current value register of the FX2N-1PG(-E) or FX2N-10PG
using the DTO instruction or directly specify the buffer memory (U\G) for D2 to be written to.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

7 Absolute Position Detection System (Absolute Current Value Read)-ABS Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

7.5

7.5 Important Points

Important Points
• Set the timing sequence for powering on your system so that the power of the PLC is turned on after the
power of the servo amplifier, or that power is turned on at the same time.
• Leave the drive contact of the DABS (FNC155) instruction ON after reading the ABS value. If the
instruction activation contact is turned off at the completion of ABS data reading, the servo-ON (SON)
signal will be turned off, and the operation will not be performed.
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during data reading, data reading will be stopped.
• This instruction is for 32-bit data only. Be sure to input this instruction as the DABS instruction.
• Observe the following items to use the FX2N-1PG(-E) or FX2N-10PG:
- ABS data will be converted into a pulse value before being read out. For this reason, be sure to specify
"motor system" when setting the parameters (BFM #3) for the FX2N-1PG(-E).
- When writing ABS data to the FX2N-10PG, be sure to use the current value register (BFM #40, BFM
#39) to store the converted pulse data.
• Even if data-communication with the servo amplifier is not performed properly, no error will be detected.
For this reason, it is necessary to monitor the handshaking operation using the time-out error detection
timer.
→ For the example programs, refer to Section 12.5.
• Set the servo motor rotation direction as described below when using the ABS instruction. Note that the
sign (plus or minus) may be different between the current value controlled by the PLC and the current
value existing in the servo amplifier after the current value is read by the ABS instruction if another
direction is set.In the MR-J2--A and MR-H--A, the setting "Forward rotation (CCW) when forward
rotation pulses are input, and reverse rotation (CW) when reverse rotation pulses are input" cannot be
changed.
- When using the positioning function built in the FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLC
Set the servo amplifier rotation direction to "Forward rotation (CCW) when forward rotation pulses are
input, and reverse rotation (CW) when reverse rotation pulses are input".
→ For details, refer to the Servo amplifier manual.
- When using the FX2N-1PT or FX2N-10PG with the FX3U or FX3UC PLC
Achieve the following relationship for the rotation direction setting between the FX2N-1PG or FX2N10PG and the servo amplifier.

B - 110

Setting in FX2N-1PG(-E)/FX2N-10PG

Setting in servo amplifier

Current value is increased by forward
rotation pulses.

Servo amplifier rotates forward (CCW) when forward
rotation pulses are input.
Servo amplifier rotates backward (CW) when
reverse rotation pulses are input.

Current value is decreased by forward
rotation pulses.

Servo amplifier rotates forward (CW) when forward
rotation pulses are input.
Servo amplifier rotates backward (CCW) when
reverse rotation pulses are input.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.1 Incremental Method and Absolute Method

A
Common Items

1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Instruction

Target position setting method
Incremental method:
Uses a relative address to specify the target position.

Drive to Absolute (DRVA) instrument

Absolute method:
Uses an absolute address to specify the target position.

Apx.

→ For important items common to all of the positioning instructions, refer to Section 4.7.
→ For example programs, refer to Chapter 12.

8.1

Incremental Method and Absolute Method
There are two target position setting methods for positioning operations as described below:

1. Incremental method (relative address setting method)
While regarding the current position as the start point, specify the transfer direction and the transfer distance
(relative address) to determine the target position.
Transfer
distance:
+100

Start point
End point

Transfer distance:
-100

Transfer distance: +100

Transfer distance: -150
Transfer distance: +50

Transfer distance: -100
0
Origin

100
Point A

300
Point C

150
Point B

For example:
-20.7km

+20.7km

Relative address
Current position Target position

To Ueno

Tokyo

Shinyokohama

Odawara

Atami

Mishima

Shizuoka

To go from Odawara (current position) to Atami (target position), set the distance (+20.7 km)
from Odawara to Atami.

B - 111

Example
Connection

Drive to Increment (DRVI) instruction

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The built-in positioning function uses the drive to increment (DRVI) instruction or the drive to absolute (DRVA)
instruction to perform 1-speed positioning. Note that these two instructions use different target position
setting methods.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.1 Incremental Method and Absolute Method

2. Absolute method (absolute address setting method)
Specify the distance (absolute address) from the origin to the target position. In this case, any position can be
the start point (current position).
Address
100

Address
150

Address 150

0
Origin

Start point
End point

Address
100
Address
300
Address 100
Address 150

100
150
Point A Point B

300
Point C

For example:
Current position Target position

Origin
To Ueno
Tokyo
Absolute address
0

→

Shinyokohama
→
28.8km

Odawara
83.9km →

Atami
Mishima
Shizuoka
104.6km → 120.7km → 180.2km

To go from Odawara (current position) to Atami (target position), set the distance (+104.6 km)
from Tokyo (origin) to Atami.

B - 112

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

8.2.1

Instruction Format

A
Common Items

8.2

16-bit
instruction

FNC 158
D
DRVI

FNC 158
DRVI

S1•

S2•

D1•

17 steps

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
DDRVI
execution
type

D2•

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type
*1

Specifies the number of output pulses (relative address).

Specifies the output pulse frequency.*2

Specifies the pulse output number.

Specifies the rotation direction signal output destination device number.

BIN16/32-bit

Bit

*1.

Setting range : -32,768 to +32,767 (excluding 0) for 16-bit operation
: -999,999 to +999,999 (excluding 0) for 32-bit operation

*2.

Setting range : 10 to 32,767 Hz for 16-bit operation
For 32-bit operation, however, the setting range is as shown in the following table.
Pulse output destination

Setting range

FX3U PLC

High-speed output special adapter

10 to 200,000(Hz)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Main unit (transistor output)

10 to 100,000(Hz)

3. Devices
Bit device

Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System
user

Others
Special
unit

Index

Constant

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K

3 3 3 3

3 3

3 3 3 3

3 3

Real Char
num- acter Pointer
ber string
E

3
3

Apx.
Example
Connection

Command
input

Continuous
execution
type

DRVI

9 steps

DRIVE TO
INCREMENT

32-bit
instruction

Instruction Execution condition
symbol

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

1. Instruction Format

1 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

B - 113

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

2 : When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC,
use the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.
→ For the outputs applicable with a High-speed output special adapter, refer to Section 4.9.
High-speed output special
adapter connection position
1st adapter

2nd adapter

Pulse output

Rotation direction output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

3 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
4 : Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

8.2.2

List of Related Devices
1. Special auxiliary relays
The following table shows the related special auxiliary relays. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000

B - 114

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.3

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379

Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

The following table shows the related special data registers. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations.
Device number
Y000

Y001

Y002

Y003

Function

Initial
value

D8340

D8342

D8352

D8362

D8372

HighHighHighHighD8344
D8354
D8364
D8374
order
order
order
order
D8345
D8346
D8347

D8355

D8365

D8375

LowLowLowLowD8356
D8366
D8376
order
order
order
order
HighHighHighHighD8357
D8367
D8377
order
order
order
order

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed (Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum speed (Hz)

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

Creep speed (Hz)

16-bit

1000

Subsection
4.2.4

Zero return speed (Hz)

32-bit

50,000

Subsection
4.2.3

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

B - 115

Apx.
Example
Connection

LowLowLowLowD8343
D8353
D8363
D8373
order
order
order
order

Refer to

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

LowLowLowLowD8350
D8360
D8370
order
order
order
order Current value register
HighHighHighHigh- (PLS)
D8341
D8351
D8361
D8371
order
order
order
order

Data
length

Common Items

2. Special data registers

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.2.3

8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

Function and Operation
This instruction uses a relative drive method to perform a 1-speed positioning instruction. For this instruction,
the transfer distance from the current position to the target position should be specified together with a plus or
minus sign. This method is also referred to as the incremental (relative) drive method.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution complete" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, and deceleration time, refer to
Section 4.2.
Command
input

FNC 158
DRVI

S2•

S1•

D1•

D2•

Acceleration
time

Deceleration
time

Speed
Maximum speed

Output pulse
frequency S2•
Number of output
pulses S1•

Bias
speed

Time
Instruction execution
"Instruction
execution complete" flag
M8029

1) For S1 , specify the number of output pulses (relative address value).
Setting range
16-bit operation

-32,768 to +32,767

32-bit operation

-999,999 to +999,999

2) For S2 , specify the output pulse frequency.
Setting range
16-bit operation

32-bit operation

10 to 32,767(Hz)

When a high-speed output special
adapter is used

10 to 200,000(Hz)

When a transistor output from the
main unit is used

10 to 100,000(Hz)

3) For D1 , specify the pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.
4) For D2 , specify the rotation direction signal output device number.
When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC, use
the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.
High-speed output special
adapter connection position
1st adapter

2nd adapter

B - 116

Pulse output
destination device

Rotation direction
output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.2 Drive to Increment - DRVI Instruction

ON/OFF status of device
specified by D2

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)
If the number of output pulses specified by S1
performed in the forward rotation direction.

Forward rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

is a positive number, the operation will be
will increase the current value.)

is a negative number, the operation will
be performed in the reverse rotation direction.

If the number of output pulses specified by S1

OFF

Reverse rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

Important Points
→ For the important points of programming, refer to Section 4.7.
• If an operand is changed during instruction execution, the change will be ignored and the operation will not
be affected.
Note that the changed operand will be enabled at the next activation of the instruction.
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during execution of the instruction, the speed will
decelerate and the operation will stop.
In this case, the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will not be turned on.
• If the limit flag (forward limit relay or reverse limit relay) in the operation direction is turned on, the speed
will decelerate and the operation will stop.
In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will be turned on when execution of the
instruction is complete.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
• While the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.

B - 117

Apx.
Example
Connection

8.2.4

will decrease the current value.)

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Common Items

The rotation direction ON/OFF status of the specified device is shown in the following table.
During instruction execution, however, do not use the output D2 for other purposes.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

8.3

Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

8.3.1

Instruction Format
1. Instruction format
16-bit
instruction

FNC 159
D DRVA

Command
input

Continuous
execution
type

DRVA

9 steps

DRIVE TO
ABSOLUTE

FNC 159
DRVA

S1•

32-bit
instruction

Instruction Execution condition
symbol

S2•

D1•

17 steps

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
DDRVA
execution
type

D2•

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type
address).*1

Specifies the number of output pulses (absolute

Specifies the output pulse frequency.*2

Specifies the pulse output number.

Specifies the rotation direction signal output destination device number.

BIN16/32-bit

Bit

*1.

Setting range : -32,768 to +32,767 for 16-bit operation
: -999,999 to +999,999 for 32-bit operation

*2.

Setting range : 10 to 32,767 Hz for 16-bit operation
For 32-bit operation, however, the setting range is as shown in the following table.
Pulse output destination
FX3U PLC

Setting range

High-speed output special adapter

10 to 200,000(Hz)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output)

10 to 100,000(Hz)

3. Devices
Bit device

Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System
user

Others
Special
unit

Index

Real CharConnum- acter Pointer
stant
ber string

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K H
S1

3 3 3 3 3

3 3

3 3 3 3 3

3 3

3
3

1 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

Caution:
• To use an FX3U Series main unit of relay output type, be sure to connect a high-speed output special
adapter. Differential line drive type outputs will be used for the outputs of the high-speed output special
adapter.

B - 118

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

1st adapter

2nd adapter

Pulse output

Rotation direction
output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

High-speed output special
adapter connection position

Apx.

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

Read only

Subsection
4.4.3

M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379

Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

B - 119

Example
Connection

3 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
4 : Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

8.3.2

A
Common Items

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

Y001

Y002*1

Y003*2

Data
length

Default
value

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed (Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum speed (Hz)

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

Creep speed (Hz)

16-bit

1000

Subsection
4.2.4

Zero return speed (Hz)

32-bit

50,000

Subsection
4.2.3

Function

LowLowLowLowD8350
D8360
D8370
order
order
order
order Current value register
HighHighHighHigh- (PLS)
D8341
D8351
D8361
D8371
order
order
order
order

D8340

D8342
D8343

D8352

D8362

D8372

LowLowLowLowD8353
D8363
D8373
order
order
order
order

HighHighHighHighD8344
D8354
D8364
D8374
order
order
order
order
D8345
D8346

D8355

D8365

D8375

LowLowLowLowD8356
D8366
D8376
order
order
order
order

HighHighHighHighD8347
D8357
D8367
D8377
order
order
order
order

B - 120

Refer to

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

Function and Operation

This instruction uses an absolute drive method to perform a 1-speed positioning instruction.
For this instruction, the distance from the origin (zero point) to the target position should be specified.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution complete" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time,
and deceleration time, refer to Section 4.2.

FNC 159
DRVA

S1•

S2•

D1•

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Command
input

D2•
Deceleration
time

Acceleration
time

Apx.
Example
Connection

Speed
Maximum speed

Output pulse
frequency S2•
Number of output
pulses S1•

Bias
speed

Time

Instruction execution
"Instruction
execution complete" flag
M8029

1) For S1 , specify the number of output pulses (absolute address value).
Setting range
16-bit operation

-32,768 to +32,767

32-bit operation

-999,999 to +999,999

2) For S2 , specify the output pulse frequency.
Setting range
16-bit operation
32-bit operation

10 to 32,767(Hz)

When a high-speed output special adapter is used 10 to 200,000(Hz)
When a transistor output from the main unit is used 10 to 100,000(Hz)

2nd adapter

Common Items

8.3.3

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

Pulse output destination device Rotation direction output
D1

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

B - 121

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

8 1-Speed Positioning - DRVI/DRVA Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

8.3 Drive To Absolute - DRVA Instruction

ON
OFF

8.3.4

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)
Forward rotation (Outputting pules from D1

will The rotation direction (normal or reverse

rotation) depends on which value is larger;
the number of output pulses specified by

increase the current value.)
Reverse rotation (Outputting pules from D1

reduce the current value.)

will

S
(absolute address) or the value
indicated in the current value register.

Important Points
→ For the important points of programming, refer to Section 4.7.
• If an the operand is changed during instruction execution, the change will be ignored and the operation will
not be affected.
Note that the changed operand will be enabled at the next activation of the instruction.
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during execution of the instruction, the speed will
decelerate and the operation will stop.
In this case, the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will not be turned on.
• If the limit flag (forward limit relay or reverse limit relay) in the operation direction is turned on, the speed
will decelerate and the operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag
(M8329) will be turned on when execution of the instruction is complete.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
• If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.

B - 122

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.1 Instruction Format

A
Common Items

One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT
Instruction

Instruction Format
1. Instruction Format
FNC 151
DVIT

16-bit
instruction

DRIVE INTERRUPT

9 steps

Command
input

FNC 151
DVIT

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
execution
type

DVIT
-

S1•

S2•

D1•

32-bit
instruction
17 steps

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
DDVIT
execution
type

D2•

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type
interruption.*1

Specifies the number of pulses (relative address) to be output after

Specifies the output pulse frequency.*2

Specifies the pulse output number.

Specifies the rotation direction signal output destination device number.

BIN16/32-bit

Bit

*1.

Setting range : -32,768 to +32,767 (excluding 0) for 16-bit operation
: -999,999 to +999,999 (excluding 0) for 32-bit operation

*2.

Setting range : 10 to 32,767 Hz for 16-bit operation
For 32-bit operation, however, the setting range should be as shown in the following
table.
Pulse output destination

Setting range

FX3U PLC

High-speed output special adapter

10 to 200,000(Hz)

FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Main unit (transistor output)

10 to 100,000(Hz)

B - 123

Apx.
Example
Connection

9.1

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

The built-in positioning function uses the Interrupt Positioning (DVIT) instruction to perform one-speed
interrupt constant quantity feed. If an FX3UC PLC Ver.1.30 or later is used, this instruction can change the
interruption signal input destination.
If an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later is used, the interruption signal can be controlled with a user program.
The FX3G PLC does not support the interrupt positioning (DVIT) instruction.
→ For items to be observed in programming, refer to Section 4.7.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.1 Instruction Format

3. Devices
Bit device

Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System user

Others
Special
unit

Index

Constant

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K

3 3 3 3

Real Charnum- acter Pointer
ber string
E

3
3

1 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*2, or
Y003*2 from a high-speed output special adapter*1.
*1.

A high-speed input/output special adapter cannot be connected to the FX3UC PLC.

*2.

To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

Point:
• To use an FX3U Series main unit of relay output type, be sure to connect a high-speed output special
adapter. Differential line drive type outputs will be used for the outputs of the high-speed output special
adapter.
2 : When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC,
use the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U/FX3UC PLC, use
transistor output for signals rotation direction.
→ For the outputs applicable with a High-speed output special adapter, refer to Section 4.9.
High-speed output special adapter connection position
1st adapter

2nd adapter

3 : D.b cannot be indexed by index registers (V and Z).

B - 124

Pulse output

Rotation direction output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

Y001

Y002

Function

Y003*1

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

Apx.

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.7

Read only

Subsection
4.4.3

Example
Connection

Interrupt input specification function enable*3

M8336*2
M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8347

M8357

M8367

M8377

Interrupt signal logic reverse*3*4

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.8

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379

Pulse output stop command*3

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.7

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.4

M8460*5 M8461*5 M8462*5 M8463*5 User interrupt input command*3
M8464*5 M8465*5 M8466*5 M8467*5
*1.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Device number

Common Items

9.2

9.2 List of Related Devices

CLEAR signal device specification function
enable*3

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*2.

This function is valid if Ver.1.30 or later is used.

*3.

Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

*4.

The logical NOT function is not valid for the user interrupt input command.

*5.

This function is valid if Ver.2.20 or later is used.

B - 125

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.2 List of Related Devices

Y001

Y002

Y003

Function
Specification of
interrupt input.

D8336*2

LowLowLowLowD8350
D8360
D8370
order
order
order
order Current value register
HighHighHighHigh- (PLS)
D8341
D8351
D8361
D8371
order
order
order
order

Data
length

Initial
value

Refer to

16-bit

Subsection
4.3.7

D8340

D8342
D8343

D8352

D8362

D8372

LowLowLowLowD8353
D8363
D8373
order
order
order
order

HighHighHighHighD8344
D8354
D8364
D8374
order
order
order
order

B - 126

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed (Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum speed (Hz)

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration time (ms)

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

D8464*3

D8465*3

D8466*3

D8467*3

Specifies the CLEAR
signal device.

16-bit

Subsection
4.3.4

*1.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*2.

This function is valid if Ver.1.30 or later is used.
However, to specify the user interrupt input command, Ver.2.20 or later should be used.

*3.

This function is valid if Ver.2.20 or later is used.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

Function and Operation
Command
input

FNC 151
DVIT

S1•

S2•

D1•

Common Items

9.3

9.3 Function and Operation

D2•

Acceleration
time
Speed

Deceleration
time

Apx.
Example
Connection

Maximum speed

Output pulse
frequency S2•
Number of output
pulses S1•

Bias
speed

Time

Instruction execution
Interrupt input
"Instruction
execution complete" flag
M8029

1) For S1 , specify the number of output pulses (relative address value).
Setting range
16-bit operation

-32,768 to +32,767 (excluding 0)

32-bit operation

-999,999 to +999,999 (excluding 0)

2) For S2 , specify the output pulse frequency.
Setting range
16-bit operation
32-bit operation

10 to 32,767(Hz)

When a high-speed output special adapter is used 10 to 200,000(Hz)
When a transistor output from the main unit is used 10 to 100,000(Hz)

3) For D1 , specify the pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.
4) For D2 , specify the rotation direction signal output device number.
When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC, use
the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U/FX3UC PLC, use
transistor output for signals rotation direction.
High-speed output special adapter number Pulse output destination device Rotation direction output
1st adapter

2nd adapter

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed,acceleration time, and deceleration time, refer to
Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8.

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

B - 127

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.3 Function and Operation

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)

specified by D2

) is set to a positive
number, the operation will be performed in the forward rotation direction.

If the number of pulses to be output after interruption (specified by S1

Forward rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

will increase the current value.)

If the number of pulses to be output after interruption (specified by S1 ) is set to a
negative number, the operation will be performed in the reverse rotation direction.

OFF

Reverse rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

will decrease the current value.)

5) The interrupt input signal depends on the pulse output of D1 as shown in the following table.
Use an FX3UC PLC Ver.1.30 or later to use the interrupt input specification function.
Use an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later to set the user interrupt input command.
Interrupt input signal
Pulse output If it is not necessary to use the
If it is necessary to use the interrupt input
destination interrupt input specification
specification function
device
function (M8336 = OFF), or if the
(M8336 = ON)
FX3UC PLC below Ver.1.30 is used
= Y000

X000

= Y001

X001

= Y002

X002

= Y003*1

X003

*1.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to
the FX3U PLC.

Designation of interrupt input using M8336 interrupt input specification function:
1) Turn on the M8336.
2) Set the interrupt input number (X000 to X007) in D8336, or specify the user interrupt input
command *1.
→ For details on the specification method, refer to Subsection 4.3.7 or Subsection 4.5.1.

Setting value

Specifies X001 for the interrupt input signal.
...

Specifies X000 for the interrupt input signal.

1
...

B - 128

Description of setting

Specifies X007 for the interrupt input signal.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.3 Function and Operation

A
Description of setting

Common Items

Setting value

Specifies a user interrupt input command*1 for the interrupt input
signal.
Pulse output destination device

9 ~ E*3

Y001

M8461

Y002

M8462

Y003*2

M8463

Apx.

Do not specify these values.
Set "F" for a pulse output destination device if the device is not used for the Interrupt
Positioning (DVIT) instruction.

*1.

A device can only be specified if an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later is used.
When using an FX3UC PLC below Ver.2.20, if "8" is set and then the specified Interrupt Positioning (DVIT)
instruction turns ON, an operation error (error code: K6763) will occur, and the instruction will not cause any
operation.

*2.

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to
the FX3U PLC.

*3.

After setting a number in the range of 9 to E for the interrupt input signal, if the corresponding Interrupt
Positioning (DVIT) instruction turns ON, an operation error (error code: K6763) will occur, and the instruction
will not cause any operation.

B - 129

Example
Connection

M8460

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

8*1

User interrupt input command

Y000

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.3 Function and Operation

Example program:
The following program shows that the interrupt input for Y000 is set using the user interrupt input
command (M8460).
M8002

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse

Command
input M8348

M101

M102

FNC151
DVIT

Positioning
Normal Abnormal
being
end of
end of
performed positioning positioning
(Y000)

S1•

D8336

SET

M8336

Interrupt input
specification
function enable.

Y000

D2•

Executes DVIT
instruction

S2•

M100

M100
Interruption
positioning being
performed

Specifies the
interrupt input for
Y000 in the user
interrupt input
specification register.

HFFF8

M8029
"Instruction execution complete" flag

M8329
"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Interruption
positioning is
being
performed.

M101

"Positioning
operation
normal end"
flag

M102

"Positioning
operation
abnormal end"
flag

FNC 06
FEND
Interruption
pointer I0

Interruption
condition

SET

M8460

Interrupt input
signal: ON

RST

M8460

Interrupt input
signal: OFF

FNC 03
IRET
END

After specifying a user interrupt input command for the interrupt input signal, if the specified device is
turned on, the number of pulses specified by S1 will be output and then the operation will be stopped.
Before activating the Interrupt Positioning instruction again, be sure to turn off the user interrupt input
command.
6) Interrupt input signal logical NOT
Turn the "Interrupt signal logic reverse" relay ON or OFF (see the following table) to specify the logic of
the interrupt input signal. However, if the user interrupt input command is set for the pulse output
destination device, the interrupt input signal logical NOT function cannot be used.
Pulse output
destination device
D1

= Y000

M8347

= Y001

M8357

= Y002

M8367

= Y003*1

M8377

*1.

B - 130

"Interrupt signal logic
reverse" relay

Description
OFF: Positive logic (Turning the input ON will turn on
the interrupt input signal.)
ON: Negative logic (Turning the input OFF will turn
on the interrupt input signal.)

Y003 can be specified as the pulse output destination only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to
the FX3U PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.3 Function and Operation

The interruption positioning operation is described below assuming that Y000 is specified as the pulse output
destination device by D1 .
For this reason, if Y001, Y002, or Y003 is specified, it is necessary to change the output number of each
related flag.
→ For details on related flags, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4, or Section 9.2.

Speed

Deceleration
time
(D8349)
Maximum speed
(D8344,D8343)

Apx.
Example
Connection

Output pulse
frequency S2•

Bias speed
(D8342)

Number of output
pulses S1•
Time

Instruction execution
Interrupt input (X000)
"Instruction
execution complete" flag
M8029

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Acceleration
time
(D8348)

Common Items

1. Interruption positioning operation

1) Execute the Interrupt Positioning (DVIT) instruction.
2) Transfer operation will be performed in the direction specified by the sign attached to the number of
output pulses (specified by S1 ) at the speed specified by the output pulse frequency (specified by
S2 ).
3) If interrupt input X000 is turned on, pulses will be output until the number of output pulses reaches the
number specified by S1 , and then the operation will stop.
4) The "instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will turn on, and the interruption positioning operation
will be completed.
→ For details on "Instruction execution complete" flag,
refer to Subsection 4.7.4.

B - 131

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.4

9.4 Important Points

Important Points
→ For details on the instruction activation timing, refer to Section 4.7.
• If the speed is too high for the number of pulses specified by S1 , the frequency will be reduced so that
the speed can be reduced within the specified number of output pulses.
Number of output
pulses specified by S1•
Output pulse
frequency
specified by S2•
Actual output
pulse frequency

Interrupt input

• If there is a possibility for the interrupt input instruction to be turned on during acceleration, specify the
number of pulses so that the relation can be set to "number of output pulses ≥ number of pulses needed for
acceleration + number of pulses needed for deceleration".
If the relation is set to "number of output pulses < number of pulses needed for acceleration + number of
pulses needed for deceleration", the operation will be as shown in the following figure:
Number of output
pulses specified by S1•

Output pulse
frequency
specified by S2•

Interrupt input

• If the interrupt input turns ON before execution of the instruction, the operation will be performed in the
same way as the DRVI instruction.
• If an operand is changed during instruction execution, the change will be ignored and the operation will not
be affected. To reflect the change on the operation, turn off the command contact of the instruction, and
then turn it on again.
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during operation, the speed will decelerate and the
operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will not be turned on.
• Input the interruption signal before the number of output pulses reaches 4,294,967,296. If the number of
pulses reaches 4,294,967,296 before inputting the interruption signal, the operation will stop, and the
"Instruction execution complete" flag (M8029) will be turned on.
→ For details on "Instruction execution complete" flag,
refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
• If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.
•

B - 132

If the forward limit relay or the reverse limit relay in the operation direction is turned on, the speed will
decelerate and the operation will stop. In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329)
will turn when execution of the instruction is complete.
→ For details on "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

9 One-speed Interrupt constant quantity feed -DVIT Instruction

Built-in Positioning Functions

9.4 Important Points

A
Common Items

• The interrupt input cannot be used for the following items:
Interrupt inputs can only be specified when using Ver.1.30 or later.
- High-speed counter
- Input interruption
- Pulse catch
- SPD instruction
- DSZR instruction
- ZRN instruction

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Apx.
Example
Connection

B - 133

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.1 Instruction Format

10. Variable Speed Operation
(Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
The built-in positioning function uses the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction equipped with the
rotation direction designation function to perform variable speed operation. If an FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or
later or FX3G PLC is used, this instruction can change the speed using the acceleration/deceleration speed.

10.1

Instruction Format
1. Instruction Format
16-bit
instruction

FNC 157
D PLSV

9 steps

PULSE V

32-bit
instruction

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
PLSV
execution
type

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
Continuous
DPLSV
execution
type

17 steps

2. Data setting
Operand type

*1.

Description

Data type

Specifies the output pulse frequency designation device number.*1

Specifies the pulse output device number.

Specifies the rotation direction signal output destination device number.

BIN 16/32-bit
Bit

Setting range : -32,768 Hz to -1 Hz and +1 Hz to 32,767 Hz for 16-bit operation. For the
32-bit operation, however, the setting range should be as shown in the following table.
Pulse output destination

Setting range

FX3U PLC

High-speed output special adapter -200,000 to -1 to +1 to 200,000(Hz)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC
PLC

Main unit (transistor output)

-100,000 to -1 to +1 to 100,000(Hz)

3. Devices
Bit device
Operand
type

Word device

System user

Digit designation

System
user

Others
Special
unit

Index

Constant

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K
3

S
D1

3 3 3 3

3 3

Real
number
E

Character Pointer
string
""

3
3

1 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.

B - 134

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.2 List of Related Devices

High-speed output special
adapter connection position
1st adapter

Rotation direction output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

Apx.
Example
Connection

2nd adapter

Pulse output

3 : D.b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
4 : Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

10.2

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only Subsection 4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end"
flag

Read only Subsection 4.4.2

Acceleration/deceleration*4

M8338*3

Drivable

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

• To use an FX3U Series main unit of relay output type, be sure to connect a high-speed output special
adapter. Differential line drive type outputs will be used for the outputs of the high-speed output special
adapter.
2 : When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC,
use the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.

Common Items

Point:

Subsection 4.3.9

M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY)
flag

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forword limit

Drivable

Subsection 4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection 4.3.1

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only Subsection 4.4.3

Read only Subsection 4.4.4

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

*4.

Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

B - 135

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.2 List of Related Devices

Y001

Y002

Function

Y003

LowLowLowLowD8350
D8360
D8370
order
order
order
order Current value register
HighHighHighHigh- (PLS)
D8341
D8351
D8361
D8371
order
order
order
order

Data
length

Initial
value

D8340

D8342
D8343

D8352

D8362

D8372

LowLowLowLowD8353
D8363
D8373
order
order
order
order

HighHighHighHighD8344
D8354
D8364
D8374
order
order
order
order

B - 136

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Refer to

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

Bias speed (Hz)

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

Maximum speed (Hz)

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

Acceleration time
(ms)*3
Deceleration time
(ms)*3

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

This device is valid for the PLSV instruction only when the acceleration/deceleration operation is performed in
the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later or FX3G PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10.3 Function and Operation

Function and Operation
The variable speed pulse output instruction changes the speed while using the rotation direction output.
The acceleration/deceleration function applies for the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction, which
makes it possible to specify whether acceleration/deceleration will be used or not.
If an FX3UC PLC below Ver.2.20 is used, operation will be performed without acceleration/deceleration.

If the output pulse frequency S value is changed after turning the
acceleration/deceleration function (M8338) OFF, the variable speed
pulse output (PLSV) instruction will change the output frequency without
using acceleration/deceleration.

Apx.
Example
Connection

M8001
M8338

FNC 157
PLSV

D1•

S•

D2•

→ For details on the maximum speed and bias speed, refer to Subsection 4.2.5 and Subsection 4.2.6.

Speed

Time
S•

100

250

500

Instruction
Activation contact

250

OFF

1) For S , specify the output pulse frequency.
Even if pulses are being output, the output pulse frequency
Acceleration/deceleration, however, will not be performed.

can be changed freely.
Setting range

16-bit operation

32-bit operation

-32,768 to -1 Hz, 1 to 32,767 Hz

When a high-speed output special
adapter is used

-200,000 to -1 Hz, 1 to 200,000 Hz

When a transistor output from the
main unit is used

-100,000 to -1 Hz, 1 to 100,000 Hz

2) For D1 , specify the pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.
3) For D2 , specify the rotation direction signal output device number.
When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC, use
the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.
High-speed output special
adapter number
1st adapter

2nd adapter

Pulse output
destination device

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

10.3.1 Operation without Acceleration/Deceleration (M8338 = OFF)

Command
input

Common Items

10.3

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction

Rotation direction
output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

B - 137

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.3 Function and Operation

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)

If the number of output pulses specified by S
be performed in the forward rotation direction.

Forward rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

is a positive number, the operation will
will increase the current value.)

If the number of output pulses specified by S is a negative number, the operation
will be performed in the reverse rotation direction.

OFF

Reverse rotation (Outputting pulses from

will decrease the current value.)

10.3.2 Operation with Acceleration/Deceleration (M8338 = ON)
If the output pulse frequency S value is changed after turning the
acceleration/deceleration (M8338) ON, the variable speed pulse output
(PLSV) instruction will accelerate or decelerate to the changed output.
If a FX3UC PLC below Ver.2.20 is used, operation will be performed without acceleration/deceleration.
M8000
M8338
Command
input

FNC 157
PLSV

D1•

S•

D2•

→ For details on the maximum speed, bias speed, acceleration time, and deceleration time, refer to
Subsection 4.2.5 to Subsection 4.2.8.
Maximum speed Initial value: 100,000 Hz

Output
pulse
frequency
S•

Speed

Bias speed
Bias speed
Initial value: 0 Hz
S•

Acceleration time
Initial value: 100 ms
100

250

Deceleration time

Time

Initial value: 100 ms
500

Instruction
Activation contact

250

1) For S , specify the output pulse frequency.
Even if pulses are being output, the output pulse frequency
deceleration will be performed.

OFF

can be changed freely. Acceleration/
Setting range

16-bit operation

32-bit operation

-32,768 to -1 Hz, 1 to 32,767 Hz

When a high-speed output special
adapter is used

-200,000 to -1 Hz, 1 to 200,000 Hz

When a transistor output from the
main unit is used

-100,000 to -1 Hz, 1 to 100,000 Hz

2) For D1 , specify the pulse output number in the range of Y000 to Y003.

B - 138

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.3 Function and Operation

1st adapter

2nd adapter

Pulse output
destination device

Rotation direction
output

= Y000

= Y004

= Y001

= Y005

= Y002

= Y006

= Y003

= Y007

Apx.
Example
Connection

The rotation direction ON/OFF status of the specified device is shown in the following table.
During execution of this instruction, however, do not use the output D2 for other purposes.
ON/OFF status of device
specified by D2
ON

Rotation direction (increase/decrease current value)
If the number of output pulses specified by S is a positive number, the operation
will be performed in the forward rotation direction.
Forward rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

OFF

will increase the current value.)

If the number of output pulses specified by S is a negative number, the
operation will be performed in the reverse rotation direction.
Reverse rotation (Outputting pulses from D1

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

High-speed output special
adapter number

Common Items

3) For D2 , specify the rotation direction signal output device number.
When a high-speed output special adapter is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3U PLC, use
the output shown in the following table for rotation direction signals.
When a built-in transistor output is used as a destination for pulse output on a FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC,
use transistor output for signals rotation direction.

will decrease the current value.)

B - 139

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

10.4

10 Variable Speed Operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)-PLSV Instruction
10.4 Important Points

Important Points
→ For important programming points, refer to Section 4.7.
• During pulse output operation, if the output pulse frequency S is changed to "K0", the PLC will reduce
the speed and then stop the pulse outputting operation if the acceleration/deceleration function is ON.
However, if the acceleration/deceleration function is not activated, the PLC will immediately stop the pulse
outputting operation.
Before outputting pulses again, check that the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is off, and then
wait until 1 or more cycles of operation have been completed. After that, set (change) the output pulse
frequency to a value other than "K0".
• During pulse outputting operation, do not change the sign attached to the output pulse frequency
value S .
If it is necessary to change the sign, stop the servo motor first by setting the output pulse frequency value
S
to "K0", and wait for the motor to stop completely after decelerating to stop. And then, change the
sign attached to the output pulse frequency value S .
If the sign attached to the output pulse frequency value S is changed during pulse outputting
operation, the operation may be changed as follows, and the machine, therefore, may be damaged:
1) The pulse outputting operation may be stopped.
2) "Pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag may be turned off.
(The pulse outputting operation may be stopped, but the motor may not be stopped immediately.)
3) Operation may be performed in the specified direction at the frequency specified by the output
pulse frequency value S .
• If the instruction activation contact is turned off during pulse outputting operation while the acceleration/
deceleration function is ON, the speed will decelerate and the operation will stop.
If the instruction activation contact is turned off during pulse outputting operation while the acceleration/
deceleration function is OFF, the operation will stop immediately. In both cases, the "Instraction execution
complete" flag (M8029) will not turn on.
• If a limit flag (forward / reverse rotation) in the operation direction is turned on, the operation will stop
immediately. In this case, the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag (M8329) will turn on when
execution of the instruction is complete.
→ For details on the "Instruction execution abnormal end" flag, refer to Subsection 4.7.4.
• If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, a positioning instruction (including PLSR and
PLSY) that uses the same output cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.
• After executing the instruction, the rotation direction signal output will turn off.

1. Important items for FX3UC PLCs below Ver.2.20
• Acceleration/deceleration will not be performed when starting or stopping the operation. For this reason, if
it is necessary to use the cushion start function or the cushion stop function, increase/decrease the output
pulse frequency value S using the FNC67 (RAMP) instruction, etc.

2. Important items for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver.2.20 or later and FX3G
PLCs
•

B - 140

If acceleration/deceleration is enabled, the variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instructions for all of the
pulse output destination devices will use acceleration/deceleration. This means that acceleration/
deceleration cannot be specified separately for each pulse output destination device.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.1 Instruction Format

A
Common Items

11. Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Instruction

Description

One-speed interrupt constant quantity feed (Interrupt positioning)

PLSV(FNC157)

Variable speed operation (Variable Speed Pulse Output)

DRVI(FNC158)

1-speed
positioning

Apx.
Example
Connection

DVIT (FNC151)

DRVA(FNC159)

Drive to Increment
Drive to Absolute

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*1.

11.1

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

If GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later is used, the positioning instructions
shown below can be preliminarily set in the positioning tables. After that,
if a table is specified, the positioning operation of the specified table will
be performed.

Instruction Format
1. Instruction Format
16-bit
instruction

FNC 152
TBL

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
-

TABLE

Command
input

32-bit
instruction

FNC152
DTBL

17 steps

Instruction Execution condition
symbol
DTBL

Continuous
execution
type

2. Data setting
Operand type

Description

Data type

Specifies the pulse output number.

Specifies the table number (1 to 100) to be executed.

Bit
BIN 32-bit

3. Devices
Bit device
Operand
type

System user

Word device
Digit designation

System user

Others
Special
unit

Index

Con- Real Charnum- acter Pointer
stant
ber string

X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V Z Modify K H
D

3 3

1 : Specify Y000, Y001, or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

High-speed input/output special adapters can be connected only to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connect a second high-speed output
special adapter.

Point:
To use an FX3U Series main unit of relay output type, be sure to connect a high-speed output special adapter.
Differential line drive type outputs will be used for the outputs of the high-speed output special adapter.

B - 141

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.2

11.2 List of Related Devices

B - 142

Y001

Y002*1

Function

Y003*2

Attribute

Refer to

M8029

"Instruction execution complete" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8329

"Instruction execution abnormal end" flag

Read only

Subsection
4.4.2

M8338

Acceleration/deceleration operation*4, *7

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.9

M8336

Interrupt input specification function enable*4, *5

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.7

Read only

Subsection
4.4.3

M8340

M8350

M8360

M8370

"Pulse output monitor"(BUSY/READY) flag

M8343

M8353

M8363

M8373

Forward limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8344

M8354

M8364

M8374

Reverse limit

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.1

M8347

M8357

M8367

M8377

Interrupt signal logic reverse*4, *6

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.8

M8348

M8358

M8368

M8378

Positioning instruction activation

Read only

Subsection
4.4.4

M8349

M8359

M8369

M8379

Pulse output stop command*4

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.2

M8460

M8461

M8462

M8463

User interrupt input command*3*, 4

Drivable

Subsection
4.3.7

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later.

*4.

Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.

*5.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 1.30 or later.

*6.

The logical NOT function is not valid for the user interrupt input command.

*7.

Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.2 List of Related Devices

The following table shows the related special data registers. Note that Y000, Y001, Y002, and Y003 are
devices that determine the pulse output destinations. To set the constants shown in the shaded area, set the
positioning parameters.
→ For details on the positioning parameters, refer to Section 11.4.
Device number
Y001

Y002

Function

Y003

Specification of
interrupt input.*3

D8336

Initial
value

Refer to

16-bit

Subsection
4.3.7

D8340

32-bit

Subsection
4.4.1

16-bit

Subsection
4.2.6

32-bit

100,000

Subsection
4.2.5

16-bit

1000

Subsection
4.2.4

LowLowLowLowD8356
D8366
D8376
order
order
order
order Zero return speed
HighHighHighHigh- (Hz)
D8347
D8357
D8367
D8377
order
order
order
order

32-bit

50,000

Subsection
4.2.3

D8342

D8352

D8362

D8372

Bias speed (Hz)

LowLowLowLowD8353
D8363
D8373
order
order
order
order Maximum speed
HighHighHighHigh- (Hz)
D8344
D8354
D8364
D8374
order
order
order
order
D8343

D8345

D8355

D8365

D8375

Creep speed (Hz)

D8346

D8348

D8358

D8368

D8378

Acceleration time
(ms)*4

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.7

D8349

D8359

D8369

D8379

Deceleration time
(ms)*4

16-bit

100

Subsection
4.2.8

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Devices related to Y003 (pulse output destination) are only valid if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

This function is valid if Ver.1.30 or later is used.
However, the user interrupt input command can be specified only if the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later is
used.

*4.

This device is valid for the PLSV instruction only when the acceleration/deceleration operation is performed in
the FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20 or later or FX3G PLC.

B - 143

Apx.
Example
Connection

LowLowLowLowD8350
D8360
D8370
order
order
order
order Current value register
HighHighHighHigh- (PLS)
D8341
D8351
D8361
D8371
order
order
order
order

Data
length

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Y000

Common Items

2. Special data registers

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.3

11.3 Function and Operation

Function and Operation
Preliminarily set the positioning parameters using GX Developer, and then specify the pulse output destination
D
and the positioning table number (n) for the DTBL instruction in order to carry out positioning.
Use GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later to set the positioning parameters.
The "number of pulses" and "frequency" set by the positioning parameters in each positioning table can be
changed using the program, display module, or HMI.
→ For details on positioning parameters, refer to Section 11.4.
Specifies the pulse output destination
device for the positioning table to be
activated.
Command
input
FNC152

DTBL

Positioning table setting

A
B

Specifies the positioning
table number to be activated.

Constant setting

As shown in the following table, each positioning instruction consists of the positioning type (4 types in total),
number of pulses (pls), frequency (Hz), etc.
For further information on the operation of each instruction, refer to the description of each instruction.
Instruction and its operand to be activated
Operand

Positioning type

Instruction
word

C
DDVIT(Interrupt Positioning)
DPLSV(Variable Speed Pulse Output)
DDRVI(Drive to Increment)
DDRVA(Drive to Absolute)

DDVIT
DPLSV
DDRVI
DDRVA

Command
input
FNC{{{

Refer to

S
S2

D1
D1

D2
D2

Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Section 8.2
Section 8.3

Number of Output pulse Pulse output
output pulses frequency destination
device

*1 PLSV(FNC157) has only 3 operands. It has no operand of number of output pulses.

B - 144

Rotation
direction
signal

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

Positioning Parameter Setting

11.4.1 Positioning Parameter Setting Using GX Developer
Assuming that GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later is used, this section describes how to set the positioning
parameters.

Open the "parameter setting" window.
On the project tree displayed on the left side of the screen, double-click "Parameter" and then "PLC
Parameter".
If the project tree is not displayed, click "View" on the menu bar, and then click "Project data list"

B - 145

Apx.
Example
Connection

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Use GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later to set the positioning parameters in the FX3U/FX3UC PLC. Use GX
Developer Ver.8.72A or later to set the positioning parameters in the FX3G PLC.
The "number of pulses" and "frequency" set by the positioning parameters in a positioning table can be
changed using the program, display module, or HMI.
→ To change the set "number of pulses" or "frequency", refer to Subsection 11.4.2.

Common Items

11.4

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

Set the memory capacity.
Click on the "Memory capacity" tab, and then click on the "Positioning Instruction Setting" check
box to enter a check in the box.

Enter a check.

Setting item

Setting range
16000*1

Memory capacity

Set the capacity of the program memory. Initial value:

Comment capacity

Set the capacity for the comments to be stored in the PLC. Initial
value: 0
Device comment: 50 points/block (500 steps)

File register capacity

Set the capacity for the file registers. Initial value: 0
File registers: 500 points/block (500 steps)

Program capacity

Displays the number of steps that can be used for the sequence
program.

Special Function Memory
capacity

Set whether the special unit initial data setting function and the
positioning data setting function should be enabled.

Enter a check in the check box to enable the special function unit/
block initial data setting function. Use the "I/O Assignment Setting"
tab to set the initial value of a special unit.

Enter a check in the check box to enable the TBL (FNC152)
instruction setting function. Use the "Positioning Data Setting" tab to
set the positioning data.

Special Function Block
*2

Settings

Positioning Instruction
settings

B - 146

Description of setting

*1.

The initial value is 8000 steps for GX Developer below Ver.8.22Y.
The initial value is "8000 steps" in the FX3G PLC.

*2.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Refer to the
programming
manual.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

A
Set the positioning data.
After entering a check, positioning data can be set. Use the FX3U/FX3UC PLC of Ver.2.20 or later or
FX3G PLC to use "Positioning".
1. Click on the "Positioning" tab.

2. Set the positioning constants to be used for TBL (FNC152) instruction.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

On the "Memory Capacity" tab, preliminarily enter a check in "Positioning Instruction Setting" check box to set
the positioning data setting table on the "Positioning" tab.

Common Items

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

Apx.
Example
Connection

Setting item
Bias speed (Hz)

Description of setting
Sets the bias speed for each pulse output number. Initial value: 0

Maximum speed (Hz) Sets the maximum speed for each pulse output number. Initial value: 100000
Creep speed (Hz)

Sets the creep speed of the DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each pulse output
number. Initial value: 1000

Zero return speed
(Hz)

Sets the zero return speed of the DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each pulse
output number. Initial value: 50000

Setting
range
1/10 or less
of the maximum speed
*1
10 to
32767*2
*1

Acceleration time (ms) Sets the acceleration time for each pulse output number. Initial value: 100

50 to 5000

Deceleration time (ms) Sets the deceleration time for each pulse output number. Initial value: 100

50 to 5000

Interrupt input of
DVIT instruction*5

Sets the interrupt input for each pulse output number to activate the DVIT
(FNC151) instruction. If a pulse output destination device does not use the
DVIT instruction, specify a user interrupt input command (M).
Initial setting:
Setting range
Y000 (pulse output destination): X000
X000 to X007, M8460
Y001 (pulse output destination): X001
X000 to X007, M8461
Y002 (pulse output destination): X002
X000 to X007, M8462
X000 to X007, M8463
Y003*4 (pulse output destination): X003

Shown on
left side

Sets data in this area if Y000 is specified as the pulse output destination device.

Sets data in this area if Y001 is specified as the pulse output destination device.

Sets data in this area if Y002 is specified as the pulse output destination device.

Y3*4

Sets data in this area if Y003 is specified as the pulse output destination device.

Individual setting

Displays the "Individual Setting" window for the TBL (FNC152) instruction table
setting.
→For details on data setting, refer to the next page.

B - 147

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

*1.

When the destination for pulse output on a FX3U or FX3UC PLC is a built-in transistor output, the
setting range is 10 to 100,000 Hz.
If an FX3U PLC is used, and if the pulse output destination is a FX3U-2HSY-ADP, the setting range will
be 10 to 200,000 Hz.

*2.

Set the creep speed so that the relation with the other speeds is "bias speed ≤ creep speed ≤
maximum speed."

*3.

The set interrupt input cannot be simultaneously used for a high-speed counter, input interruption,
pulse catch input, input for the SPD (FNC67) instruction, or for other interrupt inputs of the DVIT
(FNC151) instruction.

*4.

Note that this item can only be set if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.

*5.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*6.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

3. Click on the "Individual Setting" button to display the "Positioning instruction setting"
window. In this window, set the positioning table for each pulse output destination device.

Setting item

B - 148

Description of setting

Setting range

Click this tab to set the positioning table for Y000 (pulse output destination).

Click this tab to set the positioning table for Y001 (pulse output destination).

Y2*1

Click this tab to set the positioning table for Y002 (pulse output destination).

Y3*2

Click this tab to set the positioning table for Y003 (pulse output destination).

Rotation direction
signal

Set the rotation direction output number.*3
Initial setting:
Y010 for Y000 (pulse output destination)
Y011 for Y001 (pulse output destination)
Y012 for Y002 (pulse output destination)
Y013 for Y003*2 (pulse output destination)

Head Address

D0 to D6400
Set the first device number to store the set data (number of pulses, frequency).
*4
Starting from the set device, 1600 points will be occupied. Initial setting: R0 R0 to R31168*7

No.

Table number
Data can be set for tables 1 to 100.

Positioning
Instruction

Select a positioning type from the following types:
DDVIT (Interrupt positioning)*5, DPLSV (Variable Speed Pulse Output),
DDRVI (Drive to Increment), DDRVA (Drive to Absolute)

Pulse

Set the number of pulses to be output to perform the specified type of
positioning operation (instruction).

Frequency (Hz)

Set the speed (output pulse frequency) to perform the specified type of
positioning operation (instruction).

"Up" button

Click this button to move the cursor up by 1 line
(to select the line just above the cursor-positioned line).

"Down" button

Click this button to move the cursor down by 1 line
(to select the line just below the cursor-positioned line).

Y000 to Y357*6
M0 to M7679
S0 to S4095

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

A
"Insert" button

Description of setting

Setting range

"Delete" button

Click this button to delete the selected line.

"Delete All" button

Click this button to delete all the data from the positioning table of the selected
pulse output destination device.

If this check box is checked, the positioning data will not be initialized when the
Positioning table
PLC power is turned ON. Enter a check in this check box to retain the
setting will not be changed data ("pulses" and "frequency" changed by the program, display
initialized when the module, or HMI) even after power-off and to use the changed data after turning
PLC is powered on on the power again. To use this function, set an uninterruptible power supply
type device as the first device.

"Write" button

Click this button to write 1600 points*4 of data ("pulses" and "frequency" set on
the positioning table using GX Developer) starting from the first device of the
PLC.

"Read" button

Click this button to read out 1600 points*4 of data ("pulses" and "frequency" set
on the positioning table currently used) from the PLC starting from the first
device. At the completion of data reading, the data numbers will appear only if
"Positioning Instruction" is set for the data.

*1.

Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.

*2.

Note that this item can only be set if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.

*3.

To use an FX3U-2HSY-ADP, set the rotation direction signal depending on the pulse output destination
device as shown in the following table.
Pulse output destination device

Rotation direction signal

Y000

Y004

Y001

Y005

Y002

Y006

Y003

Y007

*4.

1200 in the FX3G series PLC.

*5.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*6.

Up to Y000 to Y177 in the FX3G series PLC.

*7.

Up to D0 to D6800, R0 to R22800 in the FX3G series PLC.

*8.

Refer to the description of the selected instruction (positioning type).
Positioning type

Refer to

DDVIT (Interrupt positioning)

Chapter 9

DPLSV (Variable Speed Pulse Output)

Chapter 10

DDRVI (Drive to Increment)

Section 8.2

DDRVA (Drive to Absolute)

Section 8.3

B - 149

Apx.
Example
Connection

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Click this button to insert a line at the specified position.

Common Items

Setting item

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

Transfer the parameters (+ sequence program) to the PLC.
1. Select "Online" from the tool menu, and then select "Write to PLC". The "Write to PLC"
window will appear.

*1.

For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

2. Enter a check in the "PLC parameter" check box, and then click the "Execute" button.
The selected parameter data will be transferred to the PLC. When the PLC is started (enters the RUN mode),
the transferred parameter data will be enabled. If the communication conditions set on the "PLC system(2)"
screen are changed, be sure to power the PLC OFF, and then ON again.

B - 150

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

Changing of Set Positioning Parameters (Number of Pulses and Frequency)
The "pulses" and "frequency" set by the positioning parameters in a positioning table will be stored in the
devices starting from the specified first device as shown below. The set "pulses" and "frequency" can be
changed using a display module or HMI.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

If the Head Address is set to "R0":

Number of
pulses

Frequency

R1,R0
R5,R4
R9,R8

R3,R2
R7,R6
R11,R10

Y001

100
1
2
3

R397,R396
R401,R400
R405,R404
R409,R408

R399,R398
R403,R402
R407,R406
R411,R410

Y002

100
1
2
3

R797,R796
R801,R800
R805,R804
R809,R808

R799,R798
R803,R802
R807,R806
R811,R810

Y003

100
1
2
3

R1197,R1196
R1201,R1200
R1205,R1204
R1209,R1208

R1199,R1198
R1203,R1202
R1207,R1206
R1211,R1210

100

R1597,R1596 R1599,R1598

Caution:
If "positioning type" is set to "DPLSV (Variable Speed Pulse Output)", the "frequency (Hz)" value set on the
screen will be stored as the set number of pulses, and the device for "frequency" will be "K0".
To use the "pulses" and "frequency" changed by a display module or HMI even after turning the
power OFF and then ON again:
To use the "pulses" and "frequency" changed
by a display module or HMI even after turning
the power OFF and then ON again, enter a
check in the "Positioning table settings will not
be initialized when the PLC is powered on"
check box in the "Positioning instruction
Setting" window of the positioning parameters.
To use this function, use the uninterruptible
power supply type devices.
If this function is not set, the data set by the
positioning parameters will be initialized.

Enter a check.

B - 151

Apx.
Example
Connection

Pulse
output Positioning
destination table No.
device
1
2
3
Y000

Common Items

11.4.2

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

11 Batch Data Positioning Mode (TBL Instruction)

Built-in Positioning Functions

11.4 Positioning Parameter Setting

To read out and store the "pulse" and "frequency" changed by a display module or HMI:
1) In the "Positioning instruction setting" window of the positioning parameters, enter a check in the
"Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered on" check box.

Enter a check.

2) Click on the "Read" button to read out the set data ("pulse" and "frequency") from the connected main
unit.
This is exclusively for the positioning table number with the positioning type specified.

Click the
"Read" button.

3) At the completion of register data reading, the data file will be stored.

B - 152

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

A
Common Items

12. Examples of Programs

Operation

Instruction

Relay ladder
program

Step ladder
program

Description
of
instruction

Mechanical zero
return

DOG Search Zero
Return

Absolute position
detection

Reading of current
ABS value

ABS(FNC155)

Drive to Increment

DRVI(FNC158)

Drive to Absolute

DRVA(FNC159) Subsection 12.2.1 Subsection 12.3.1 Section 8.3

1-speed positioning

Batch data positioning mode

DSZR(FNC150) Subsection 12.2.1 Subsection 12.3.1 Section 6.2

TBL(FNC152)

Section 12.5

Chapter 7

Subsection 12.2.1 Subsection 12.3.1 Section 8.2
Section 12.4

Chapter 11

B - 153

Apx.
Example
Connection

Examples of programs

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Assuming that the MELSERVO Series 1-axis servo amplifier is used for control, this chapter shows various
examples of programs.
For the connection examples of MELSERVO-C, -J2(S), -H, and -J3 Series, refer to the following chapters and
manuals.
→ Refer to Chapter 3 and the examples of connection shown in the Appendix.
→ Refer to the manual of your servo amplifier.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12.1

12 Examples of Programs
12.1 Input/Output Assignment

Input/Output Assignment
The programs shown in this chapter use 1 axis for Y000 (pulse output destination device). If other pulse
output destination device are used, change various device numbers when reading the description.
Note that Y003 (pulse output destination device) can be used only if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to the FX3U PLC.
Input/output number

Signal

Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003

Pulse train*1
(pulse output destination)

Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003

Direction*2, *3
(rotation direction signal)

Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007

*3, *4

Y020 Y024 Y030 Y034

CLEAR signal

*4, *5

X004 X005 X006 X007

"Servo ready" signal

X014 X015 X016 X017

Immediate stop command

X020 X040 X050 X070

Zero return command

X021 X041 X051 X071

Zero-phase signal

Jog (+) command

X022 X042 X052 X072

Jog (-) command

X023 X043 X053 X073

Forward rotation positioning
command

X024 X044 X054 X074

Reverse rotation positioning
command

X025 X045 X055 X075

Stop command

X030 X034 X060 X064
*4, *5

Near-point signal (DOG)
Interrupt signal

Connected to MELSERVO Series
servo amplifier.

Connected to external switches.

X010 X011 X012 X013
X000 X001 X002 X003

X026 X046 X056 X076

Reverse rotation limit (LSR)*7

X027 X047 X057 X077

Forward rotation limit (LSF)

Connected to

ABS(bit0)

X031 X035 X061 X065

ABS(bit1)

X032 X036 X062 X066

Connected to sensors and limit switches.

"Send data ready"
X033 X037 X063 X067
To use absolute signal
Connected to Mitsubishi MELSERVO Series
position detection Servo-ON signal
Y021 Y025 Y031 Y035 servo amplifier
system
(MR-J2,MR-J2S, MR-J3, MR-H)
"ABS data transfer
Y022 Y026 Y032 Y036
mode" signal
"ABS data
request" signal

B - 154

Y023 Y027 Y033 Y037

*1.

To use the "forward rotation pulse train" signal and "reverse rotation pulse train" signal of a FX3U2HSY-ADP, change the name of this signal to "forward rotation pulse train" signal when reading the
description.

*2.

To use the "forward rotation pulse train" signal and "reverse rotation pulse train" signal of a FX3U2HSY-ADP, change the name of this signal to "reverse rotation pulse train" signal when reading the
description.

*3.

If an FX3UC PLC below Ver.2.20 is used, exchange the direction signal output number with the CLEAR
signal output number.

*4.

If the absolute position detection system is used, and if the DSZR instruction and ZRN instruction are
not used for the first zero return, this signal is not needed. To use the absolute position detection
system, refer to the following chapter and manual.
→ Refer to Chapter 7 and the manual of your servo amplifier.

*5.

To use the ZRN instruction for zero return, assign the input number of the near-point signal (DOG) to
the zero-phase signal. This is needed since the ZRN instruction will not use the zero-phase signal.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

*7.

To use pin 3 of the CN1 connector of the MR-CA servo amplifier for the "servo ready" signal, set
parameter 21 as follows:
Series

Parameter number

Setting value

MR-C

020

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable controller side)

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)
LSF

Servo motor

Apx.
Example
Connection

Reverse rotation

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

To ensure safety, use a forward rotation limit switch and reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the
PLC side and the servo amplifier side.
Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit switches
on the servo amplifier side.

A
Common Items

*6.

12.1 Input/Output Assignment

Forward rotation

B - 155

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12.2

12 Examples of Programs

12.2 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Relay Ladder Program)

Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Relay Ladder Program)

12.2.1 Example Program
Positioning operation will be performed using the absolute positioning method shown in the following chart:
→ For details on input/output assignment, refer to Section 12.1.
500,000
Output pulse frequency:
100,000 Hz
100
Origin
Acceleration/deceleration time:
100 ms

The following program is a relay ladder program.
M8349

Stops outputting Y000
pulses. (Immediate stop)
Refer to Subsection 4.7.2.

RST

M10

Resets the "origin return
completion" flag.

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

M8343

Forward rotation limit(Y000)

M8344

Reverse rotation limit(Y000)

D8464

Enables the origin return
operation with CLEAR signal
outputting function. (CLEAR
signal: Y020)

X020
Immediate stop

X014
Servo ready

X026
Forward rotation limit

X027
Reverse rotation limit

M8000

FNC 12
MOVP

RUN monitor

H0020

M8464
M8341
M8000

M8342

RUN monitor

M8002

FNC 12
DMOV

FNC 12
MOV

K1000

D8345

Sets the creep speed.
1,000(Hz)→D8345

FNC 12
DMOV

K50000

D8346

Sets the origin return speed.
50,000(Hz)→D8347,D8346

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8348

Sets the acceleration time.
100(ms)→D8348

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8349

Sets the deceleration time.
100(ms)→D8349

Initial pulse

*1.

B - 156

Performs origin return in the
forward rotation direction.

K100000 D8343

Sets the maximum speed.
100,000(Hz)→D8344,D8343

If the initial values (maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration time, zero return speed, creep speed)
can be used, it is not necessary to create the program.
→ For the related devices, refer to Section 4.1 to Section 4.4.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12 Examples of Programs

12.2 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Relay Ladder Program)

A
M8348

Zero Positioning
return being
performed
(Y000)

M101

M102

Normal
end of
zero
return

Abnormal
end of
zero
return

M10

RST

M12

RST

M13

X030
Stop
command

FNC 150
DSZR

X010

X004

Near-point
signal

Zerophase
signal

M8029

Y000

SET

M8329

JOG Positioning
(+) being
performed
*1
(Y000)

M104

Y004

Zero return instruction
with DOG search
function
(CLEAR signal: Y020)

M10

"Zero return
completion" flag

M101

Normal end of zero
return

M102

Abnormal end of
zero return

Abnormal
end

Completes
the JOG(+)
operation.

RST

M12

RST

M13

M103

JOG(+) operation is
being performed.

X030
Stop
command

X022
Jogging operation

Zero return is being
performed.

Pulse
Rotation
output
direction
destination signal
number

"Execution
completion" flag

X022 M8348

M100

FNC 158 K999999 K30000
DDRVI

Y000

Number of Output
Pulse
Rotation
output pulses pulse
output
direction
(maximum value frequency destination signal
in "+" direction)
number

M104

JOG(+)
M8329
X023 M8348

M106

JOG Positioning
(-) being
performed
*1
(Y000)

Completes
the JOG(-)
operation.

Abnormal
end

X030
Stop
command

X023
JOG(-)

FNC 158 K-999999 K30000
DDRVI

JOG(+) operation is
being performed.
Performs the jogging
operation in the "+"
direction using the
drive to Increment
instruction.
(Y004=ON)
Completes the
JOG(+) operation.

Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

RST

M12

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

M105

JOG(-) operation is
being performed.

M105
JOG(-) operation is
being performed.

Y004

Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.
Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

Y000

Y004

Number of Output
Pulse
Rotation
output pulses pulse
output
direction
(maximum value frequency destination signal
in "-" direction)
number

M106

Performs the jogging
operation in the "-"
direction using the
drive to Increment
instruction.
(Y004=OFF)
Completes the
JOG(-) operation.

M8329
Abnormal
end

*1.

The maximum transfer distance for each jogging operation is ±999,999 pulses (pulse output range of
FNC158 (DRVI) instruction). To move the workpiece further, execute the JOG command again.

B - 157

Apx.
Example
Connection

Zero return

Zero return being
performed

Resets the "zero
return completion"
flag.
Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.
Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

M100

RST

Common Items

X021

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

Positioning in forward rotation direction

X024 M8348
Positioning in
forward
rotation
direction

Positioning
operation
being
performed

M10
"Zero
return
completion"
flag

M107

12 Examples of Programs

12.2 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Relay Ladder Program)

M108
Normal
end of
positioning
in forward
rotation
direction

M109
Abnormal
end of
positioning
in forward
rotation
direction

RST

M12

RST

M13
M107

Positioning operation being
performed in forward rotation
direction

X030 FNC 159
K500000 K100000 Y000
Stop DDRVA

command

Y004

Designation Output
Pulse Rotation
of absolute
pulse
output direction
position
frequency destination signal
number

M8029

SET

"Execution
completion"
flag

M12
M108

M8329

M109

Abnormal end

Positioning in reverse rotation direction

X025 M8348
Positioning in
reverse
rotation
direction

Positioning
operation
being
performed
M110 (Y000)

M10

M111

"Zero
return
completion"
flag

Normal
end of
positioning
in reverse
rotation
direction

Positioning operation being
performed in reverse
rotation direction

M112
Abnormal
end of
positioning
in reverse
rotation
direction

RST

M12

RST

M13
M110

X030 FNC 159
K100 K100000
Stop DDRVA

command

M8029
"Execution
completion"
flag

M8329
Abnormal end

Y000

Y004

Pulse Rotation
Designation Output
output direction
of absolute pulse
frequency destination signal
position
number

SET

M13

"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag
Positioning
operation being
performed in
forward rotation
direction
Moves to absolute
position 500000
using the absolute
positioning
instruction.
(Y004=ON)
"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning normal
end" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning
abnormal end" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag
"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag
Positioning
operation being
performed in
reverse rotation
direction
Moves to absolute
position 100 using
the absolute
positioning
instruction.
(Y004=OFF)
"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag

M111

"Reverse rotation
positioning normal
end" flag

M112

"Reverse rotation
positioning
abnormal end" flag

END

B - 158

"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12.3 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)

Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)

12.3.1 Example Program

500,000
Output pulse frequency:
100,000 Hz
100

Apx.
Example
Connection

Origin
Acceleration/deceleration time:
100 ms

The following program uses the step ladder (STL) instruction.
X020

M8349

Immediate stop

X014
Servo ready

M10

Resets the "zero return
completion" flag.

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

M8343

Forward limit (Y000)

M8344

Reverse limit (Y000)

D8464

Enables the zero return
operation with CLEAR signal
outputting function. (CLEAR
signal: Y020)

Forward rotation limit

X027
Reverse rotation limit

FNC 12
MOVP

RUN monitor

Stops outputting Y000 pulses.
(Immediate stop) Refer to
Section 4.7.2.

RST

X026

M8000

H0020

M8464
M8341
M8000

M8342

RUN monitor

S10

S11

S12

Zero
return

JOG
(+)

JOG
(-)

Positioning
in forward
rotation
direction

S13
Positioning in
reverse
rotation
direction

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Positioning operation will be performed using the absolute positioning method as shown in the following chart:
→ For details on input/output assignment, refer to Section 12.1.

A
Common Items

12.3

12 Examples of Programs

M8349
Stoppage of Y0
pulse
outputting
operation

Performs zero return in the
forward rotation direction.
Operation is stopped.

B - 159

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12.3 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)

M8002

FNC 12
DMOV

FNC 12
MOV

K1000

D8345

Sets the creep speed.
1,000(Hz)→D8345

FNC 12
DMOV

K50000

D8346

Sets the zero return speed.
50,000(Hz)→D8347,D8346

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8348

Sets the acceleration time.
100(ms)→D8348

FNC 12
MOV

K100

D8349

Sets the deceleration time.
100(ms)→D8349

RST

M10

Resets the "zero return
completion" flag.

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

SET

Enters the zero return state
(S0).

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

SET

S10

Enters the JOG(+) state
(S10).

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

SET

S11

Enters the JOG(-) state
(S11).

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

SET

S12

Enters the forward rotation
positioning state (S12).

Initial pulse

X021

Zero
return

Operation
stopped

X022

JOG(+)
*2

Operation
stopped

X023

JOG(-)
*2

Operation
stopped

X024

K100000 D8343

Sets the maximum speed.
100,000(Hz)→D8344,D8343

M10

Positioning Operation "Zero return
in forward stopped completion" flag
rotation
direction

B - 160

12 Examples of Programs

*1.

*2.

The maximum transfer distance for each jogging operation is ±999,999 pulses (pulse output range of
FNC158 (DRVI) instruction). To move the workpiece further, execute the JOG command again.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12 Examples of Programs

12.3 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)

A
M5

Positioning
in reverse
rotation
direction

M10

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse rotation
positioning completion" flag.

SET

S13

Enters the reverse rotation
positioning state (S13).

STL

Zero return

X030*3

FNC 150

DSZR
Stop
command

Waiting for
1 scan time

X010

X004

Nearpoint
signal

ZeroPulse Rotation
phase
output direction
signal destination signal
number

M8029
"Execution completion" flag

Y000

Y004

SET

M10

RST

"Zero return completion" flag

M50

M8340

End of zero return
(Self-reset)

Y000
Waiting for
Outputting 1 scan time
*4

M8000

M50

Waiting for 1 scan time

STL

S10

JOG(+)

Y000

Y004

Performs the jogging
operation in the "+" direction
using the drive to Increment
instruction.(Y004=ON)

RUN monitor

X022

M51

X030*3

JOG(+) Waiting

Stop
for 1 scan command
time

M8340

FNC 158 K999999 K30000
DDRVI

Rotation
Pulse
Number of output Output
direction
pulse
output
pulses (maximum
value in "+" frequency destination signal
number
direction)

M51

Jogging operation

RST

M8000
M51

Waiting for 1 scan time

STL

S11

JOG(-)

Y000

Y004

Performs the jogging
operation in the "-" direction
using the drive to Increment
instruction.(Y004=OFF)

RUN monitor

M52

X030*3

JOG(-) Waiting for

Stop
1 scan time command

M8340

M52

Ends the JOG(+) operation.
(Self-reset)

S10

Y000 Waiting for 1 scan time
Outputting

X23

Zero return instruction with
DOG search function
(CLEAR signal: Y020)

FNC 158 K-999999 K30000
DDRVI

Number of Output
Pulse
Rotation
output pulses
pulse
output
direction
(maximum value frequency destination signal
in "-" direction)
number

RST

Ends the JOG(-) operation.
(Self-reset)

S11

Y000
Waiting for
Outputting 1 scan time

M8000
RUN monitor

M52

Waiting for 1 scan time

*3.

To stop the positioning operation, be sure to insert the stop contact before the positioning instruction so that STL
instruction cannot be turned off (reset) until the "pulse output monitor" flag (M8340 (for Y000)) is turned off.

*4.

To prevent simultaneous activation of positioning instructions, the instruction activation timing should be delayed by 1
scan time.

B - 161

Apx.
Example
Connection

M50

Zero return

M12

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

RST
Operation "Zero return
stopped
completion" flag

Common Items

X025

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Positioning in forward rotation direction

Built-in Positioning Functions

M53

X030

12 Examples of Programs

12.3 Programs for Forward/Reverse Rotation (Step Ladder (STL) Program)

Stop
Waiting for
1 scan time command

FNC 159 K500000 K100000
DDRVA

STL

S12

Positioning in forward rotation
direction

Y000

Y004

Moves to absolute position
500000 using the drive to
Absolute instruction.
(Y004=ON)

Designation Output
Pulse
Rotation
of absolute
pulse
output
direction
position
frequency destination signal
number

M8029
SET

M12

"Forward rotation positioning
completion" flag

RST

S12

Ends the positioning
operation in the forward
rotation direction.
(Self-reset)

"Execution completion" flag
M8340

M53

Y000
Waiting for 1 scan time
Outputting
*6

M8000
M53

Waiting for 1 scan time

STL

S13

Positioning in reverse rotation
direction

Y000

Y004

Moves to absolute position
100 using the drive to
Absolute instruction.
(Y004=OFF)

Positioning in reverse rotation direction

RUN monitor

M54

X030*5

Waiting for
1 scan
time

Stop
command

FNC 159
DDRVA

K100

K100000

Pulse
Rotation
Designation Output
output
direction
of absolute
pulse
position
frequency destination signal
number

M8029
"Execution completion" flag
M8340
Y000
Outputting
M8000

SET

M13

"Reverse rotation positioning
completion" flag

RST

S13

Ends the positioning
operation in the reverse
rotation direction.
(Self-reset)

M54
Waiting for 1 scan time

RUN monitor

M54

Waiting for 1 scan time

RET

END

B - 162

*5.

To stop the positioning operation, be sure to insert the stop contact before the positioning instruction
so that the STL instruction cannot be turned off (reset) until the "pulse output monitor" flag (M8340 (for
Y000)) is turned off.

*6.

To prevent simultaneous activation of positioning instructions, the instruction activation timing should
be delayed by 1 scan time.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

Positioning Using Batch Setting Method
Positioning operation will be performed using the absolute positioning method as shown in the following chart:
→ For details on input/output assignment, refer to Section 12.1
500,000

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Output pulse frequency:
100,000 Hz
100
Origin

Apx.
Example
Connection

Acceleration/deceleration time:
100 ms

12.4.1 Setting Using GX Developer

This section describes how to set the positioning parameters using GX Developer Ver.8.23Z.

On the project tree displayed on the left side of the screen, double-click on
"Parameter" and then "PLC parameter".

If the project tree is not displayed on the screen, click on "View" in the menu bar, and then click on "Project Data
List".

Click on "Memory Capacity", and then enter a check in the "Positioning
Instruction settings" check box.

Enter a check.

*1.

Common Items

12.4

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method

9,000 steps are needed to set the positioning data. If there is not enough capacity for programming,
set the "memory capacity" to 16,000 steps.

B - 163

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method

Click on the "Positioning" tab, and then set Y000 (pulse output destination)
as follows.

Before clicking on the "Positioning" tab, click on the "Memory Capacity" tab, and then enter a check in the
"Positioning" check box. After entering a check, positioning data can be set.
After entering a check, positioning data can be set. Use the FX3U/FX3UC PLC of Ver.2.20 or later or FX3G PLC
to use "Positioning".

Setting item

Setting value

Bias speed (Hz)

500

Maximum speed (Hz)

100,000

Creep speed (Hz)

1000

Zero return speed (Hz)

50,000

Acceleration time (ms)

100

Deceleration time (ms)

100
*1

X000

Interrupt input for DVIT instruction

*1.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Click on the "Individual setting" button. The "Individual setting" setting
window will appear. In this window, click on the "Y000" tab to display the
positioning table for Y000 (pulse output destination). Set the data in the
positioning table as follows:
Setting item

Rotation direction signal
First device
Positioning type
No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

No. 4

Number of pulses (PLS)

Y004
R0
DDRVI
(drive to increment)
999,999

Frequency (Hz)

30,000

Positioning type

DDRVI
(drive to increment)

Number of pulses (PLS)

-999,999

Frequency (Hz)

30,000

Positioning type

DDRVA
(drive to absolute)

Number of pulses (PLS)

500,000

Frequency (Hz)

100,000

Positioning type

DDRVA
(drive to absolute)

Number of pulses (PLS)
Frequency (Hz)

B - 164

Setting value

100
100,000

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

A
Create a program.
On the bar, click on "Online" and then "Write to PLC". The "Write to PLC"
window will appear.

Common Items

5
6

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Apx.
Example
Connection

*2.

For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

Click the "Param+Prog" buttons, and then click the "Execute" button.
The parameters and the created program will be transferred to the PLC.
To enable the transferred parameters, stop the PLC, and then restart it.

12.4.2 Operation Program
An example of a relay ladder program is shown below:
M8349

Stops outputting Y000 pulses.
(Immediate stop)
Refer to Subsection 4.7.2.

RST

M10

Resets the "origin return
completion" flag.

RST

M12

Resets the "forward rotation
positioning completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reversed rotation
positioning completion" flag.

M8343

Forward rotation limit(Y000)

M8344

Reverse rotation limit(Y000)

D8464

Enables the origin return
operation with CLEAR signal
outputting function. (CLEAR
signal: Y020)

X020
Immediate stop

X014
Servo ready

X026
Forward rotation limit

X027
Reverse rotation limit

M8000
RUN monitor

FNC 12
MOVP

H0020

M8464
M8341
M8000
RUN monitor

M8342

Performs origin return in the
forward rotation direction.

B - 165

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

X021

M8348

Origin Positioning
return being
performed

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method

M101

M102

Normal
end of
origin
return

Abnormal
end of
origin
return

M100

RST

M10

Resets the "origin
return completion"
flag.

RST

M12

Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

RST

M13

Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

M100

Origin return is
being performed.

Origin return

Origin return
being performed

X030
Stop
command

FNC 150
DSZR

X010

X004

Near-point Zero-point
signal
signal

M8029

Y000

Rotation
Pulse
direction
output
destination signal
number

"Origin return
completion" flag

M101

Normal end of
origin return

M102

Abnormal end of
origin return

RST

M12

Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

RST

M13

M8329

JOG Positioning
(+) being
performed
(Y000)

M104

Abnormal
end

Completes
the JOG(+)
operation.

M103

JOG(+) operation is
being performed.

X030
Stop
command

FNC 152
DTBL

Jogging operation

Y000

M106

JOG Positioning
(-) being
performed
(Y000)

Completes
the JOG(-)
operation.

Abnormal
end

RST

M12

Resets the "forward
rotation positioning
completion" flag.

RST

M13
M105

X030
Stop
command

X023
JOG(-)

M8329
Abnormal
end

B - 166

FNC 152
DTBL

Executes No. 1 of
the positioning
table of Y000
(pulse output
destination).
Completes the
JOG(+) operation.

M105
JOG(-) operation is
being performed.

Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.
JOG(+) operation
is being performed.

M104

JOG(+)
M8329
X023 M8348

Pulse
Table
output
number
destination
number

X022

Origin return
instruction with
DOG search
function
(CLEAR signal:
Y020)

M10

SET

"Execution
completion" flag

X022 M8348

Y004

Y000

Pulse
Table
output
number
destination
number

M106

Resets the "reverse
rotation positioning
completion" flag.
JOG(-) operation
is being
performed.
Executes No. 2 of
the positioning
table of Y000
(pulse output
destination).
Completes the
JOG(-) operation.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

12 Examples of Programs

Built-in Positioning Functions

12.4 Positioning Using Batch Setting Method

"Zero
return
completion"
flag

M107

Normal
end of
positioning
in forward
rotation
direction

M109
Abnormal
end of
positioning
in forward
rotation
direction

RST

M12

RST

M13
M107

Positioning operation being
performed in forward rotation
direction

X030
Stop
command

FNC 152 Y000
DTBL

Pulse
Table
output number
destination
number

M8029

SET

"Execution
completion"
flag

M12
M108

M8329

M109

Abnormal end

Positioning in reverse rotation direction

X025 M8348
Positioning in
reverse
rotation
direction

Positioning
operation
being
performed
M110 (Y000)

M10

M111

"Zero
return
completion"
flag

Normal
end of
positioning
in reverse
rotation
direction

Positioning operation being
performed in reverse
rotation direction

M112
Abnormal
end of
positioning
in reverse
rotation
direction

RST

M12

RST

M13
M110

X030
Stop
command

M8029
"Execution
completion"
flag

M8329
Abnormal end

FNC 152
DTBL

Y000

Pulse
Table
output number
destination
number

SET

"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag
"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag
Positioning
operation being
performed in
forward rotation
direction
Executes No. 3 of
the positioning table
of Y000 (pulse
output destination).
"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning normal
end" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning
abnormal end" flag
"Forward rotation
positioning
completion" flag
"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag
Positioning
operation being
performed in
reverse rotation
direction
Executes No. 4 of
the positioning table
of Y000 (pulse
output destination).

M13

"Reverse rotation
positioning
completion" flag

M111

"Reverse rotation
positioning normal
end" flag

M112

"Reverse rotation
positioning
abnormal end" flag

END

B - 167

Apx.
Example
Connection

Positioning in forward rotation direction

Positioning
operation
being
performed

M108

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Positioning in
forward
rotation
direction

M10

Common Items

X024 M8348

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

12.5

12 Examples of Programs
12.5 Program for Reading Current ABS Value Using ABS Instruction

Program for Reading Current ABS Value Using ABS Instruction
1) Program for storing ABS data in current value registers specified by a positioning instruction for Y000
(pulse output destination)
M8000
RUN
monitor

FNC155
DABS
M1

S•

D1•

D2•

X031

Y021

D8340

ABS(bit0) Servo-ON
signal

ABS data reading completed

Reads out the ABS data to the current value registers
D8341 and D8340.

K50
T0

Read time limit (5 sec)

ABS data read error

ABS data reading is complete.

T0
Read time error detected
M8029
SET

"Execution
completion" flag

2) Program for storing ABS data in the current value registers of the FX2N-1PG(-E) or FX2N-10PG
M8000
RUN
monitor

FNC155
DABS

S•

D1•

D2•

X031

Y021

D100

Reads out the ABS data to D101 and D100.

ABS(bit0) Servo-ON
signal
K50

M1
T0

Read time limit (5 sec)

ABS data read error

SET

ABS data reading is complete.

D100

U\G26

ABS data reading completed
T0
Read time error detected
M8029
"Execution
completion" flag
M1
ABS data
reading is
completed.
M1
ABS data
reading is
completed.

FNC12
DMOV

Writes data in current value registers #27 and #26 of the
FX2N-1PG. *1

Block No.
BFM#26(#27)
FNC12
DMOV

D100

U\G39

Writes data (data converted into pulse data) to the
current value registers #40 and #39 of the FX2N-10PG.*2

Block No.
BFM#39(#40)

Caution:

B - 168

*1.

The ABS data will be read out as a pulse converted value. For this reason, be sure to specify "motor
system" when setting parameters (BFM #3) for the FX2N-1PG(-E).

*2.

When writing the ABS data to the FX2N-10PG, be sure to use the current value registers (BFM #40,
BFM #39) to store the converted pulse data.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

13 Troubleshooting

Built-in Positioning Functions

13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

A
Common Items

13. Troubleshooting

LED Indicator Lamp Check

FX3U PLC

FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC

FX3UC-32MT-LT (-2) PLC

FX3G PLC

13.1.1 POWER Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, flashing, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC]
Lamp
status

Status of PLC

Troubleshooting

The specified voltage is properly
The power is being supplied properly.
supplied to the power supply terminal.
The PLC may be at one of the following
statuses:
• Check the power supply voltage.
• The specified voltage/current is not
• Excluding the power cable, disconnect all other cables, and
supplied to the power supply
Flashing
then turn the power ON again. Check the lamp status. If the
terminal.
lamp flashes again, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi
• An external line is not properly
Electric distributor office .
connected.
• The PLC has a problem.
ON

B - 169

Apx.
Example
Connection

If an error occurs, check the ON/OFF status of the LED indicator lamps on the PLC to assess the general
meaning of the error. This section does not describe all the LED indicator lamps of the main unit. For details
on the LED indicator lamps, refer to the following PLC manuals.
→ Refer to the FX3G Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition.

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

13.1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

B - 170

13 Troubleshooting
13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

Lamp
status

Status of PLC

Troubleshooting

OFF

The PLC may be at one of the following
statuses:
• The power is off.
• The specified voltage is not
supplied to the power supply
terminal.
• The power cable is disconnected.

If the power is on, check the power supply unit and the power supply
line.
If the power is properly supplied, please contact the nearest
Mitsubishi Electric distributor office.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

13 Troubleshooting

Built-in Positioning Functions

13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

Lamp
status
ON

Troubleshooting

The sequence program is being
The RUN indicator lamp indicates the operation status of the PLC.
executed.
Note that the RUN indicator lamp will go out depending on the status
Execution of the sequence program is
of the ERROR indicator lamp (refer to Subsection 13.1.4).
stopped.

13.1.3 BATT Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3U/FX3UC]

ON
OFF

Status of PLC

Apx.

Troubleshooting

The voltage of the battery is too low.
Immediately replace the battery (refer to the manual of the PLC).
The battery supplies enough voltage as
The PLC has no problems.
specified by D8006.

13.1.4 ALM Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3G]
This LED is valid when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected using a parameter.
Lamp
status

ON
OFF

Status of PLC

Troubleshooting

The voltage of the battery is too low.
Immediately replace the battery (refer to the manual of the PLC).
The battery supplies enough voltage as
The PLC has no problems.
specified by D8006.

13.1.5 ERROR indicator lamp (Statuses: ON, flashing, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC]
Lamp
status

Status of PLC

Troubleshooting

1) Stop the PLC, and then turn the power ON again. If the
ERROR (ERR) indicator lamp goes out, check to see if a
watchdog timer error has been detected, and take one of the
following measures.
- Review the program.
The maximum value of the scanning time (D8012) should
not be larger than the set value of the watchdog timer
(D8000).
- The interrupt input and the pulse catch input should not be
turned on and off too frequently during 1 scan time.
- The frequency of the pulse input to the high-speed counter
should not exceed the specified range (duty:50%)
- Add several WDT instructions.
Set several WDT instructions in the program so that the
watchdog timer can be reset several times during 1 scan
A watchdog timer error may have
time.
been detected, or the hardware of the
- Change the set value of the watchdog timer.
PLC may be damaged.
Using the program, change the set value of the watchdog
timer (D8000) so that the set value of the watchdog timer
(D8000) can be larger than the maximum value of the
scanning time (D8012).
2) Remove the PLC, and put it on a workbench. Supply another
source of power to the PLC.
If the ERROR (ERR) indicator lamp does not light, the cause
of the problem may be noise. In this case, take the following
measures.
- Check the grounding line, and change the wiring route and
the installation place.
- Adopt a noise filter for the power supply line.
3) If measures 1) and 2) do not turn the ERROR indicator lamp
OFF, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor
office.

B - 171

Example
Connection

Lamp
status

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

OFF

Status of PLC

Common Items

13.1.2 RUN Indicator Lamp (Statuses: ON, OFF) [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC]

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions
Lamp
status

13 Troubleshooting
13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

Status of PLC

Troubleshooting

The PLC has one of the following Diagnose the PLC (PC), or check the programs using the
errors:
programming tool.
For countermeasures, refer to the following manual of the applied
Flashing • Parameter error
PLC.
• Syntax error
→ Programming manual
• Circuit error
OFF

B - 172

Errors that can stop the PLC are not
detected.

If an operation error is detected on the PLC, diagnose the PLC
(PC), or check the programs using the programming tool. There
is a good possibility that an "I/O configuration error", "parallel link/
communication error", or "operation error" has been detected.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

13 Troubleshooting

Built-in Positioning Functions

Pulse Output Destination Device and Rotation Direction Output Indicator Lamp

Common Items

13.1.6

13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

1. If transistor outputs from the main unit are used for positioning
Signal

Description

Turned on and off at
The pulse outputting operation is controlled by the positioning instruction.
high speed

"Rotation
direction output"
(direction) signal

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The operation of the positioning instruction is completed.
2) The positioning instruction turns ON, but an operation error is detected.
The instruction, therefore, is not being executed. To check the error,
refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error code check method".

Operation is being performed in the forward rotation direction.

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The positioning instruction turns ON, and operation is being performed
in the reverse rotation direction.
2) The positioning instruction turns ON, but an operation error is detected.
The instruction, therefore, is not being executed. To check the error,
refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error Code Check Method".

B - 173

Apx.
Example
Connection

"Pulse output
destination
device" (pulse
train) signal

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

LED status during
execution of
positioning
instruction

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

13 Troubleshooting
13.1 LED Indicator Lamp Check

2. If the high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-ADP) is used for positioning
Status of pulse
output method
setting switch

Signal

LED status during
execution of
positioning
instruction

Description

Turned on and off The pulse outputting operation is controlled by the
at high speed
positioning instruction.
"Pulse output
destination device"
(pulse train)

PLS•DIR side

"Rotation direction
output" (direction)

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The operation of the positioning instruction is
completed.
2) An operation error occurred during positioning.
The instruction, therefore, is not being executed.
To check the error, refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error Code
Check Method".

Forward operation is in execution.

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The positioning instruction turns ON, and operation
is being performed in the reverse rotation direction.
2) An operation error occurred during positioning
instruction. The instruction, therefore, is not being
executed.
To check the error, refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error Code
Check Method".

Turned on and off Forward operation is being executed for a positioning
at high speed
instruction. Reverse pulse train is OFF.
"Pulse output
destination device"
(Forward pulse train)

FP/RP side

Turned on and off Reverse operation is being executed for a positioning
at high speed
instruction. Forward pulse train is OFF.
"Rotation direction
output" (Reverse
pulse train)

B - 174

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The positioning instruction turns ON, and operation
is being performed in the reverse rotation direction.
2) An operation error occurred during positioning .
The instruction, therefore, is not being executed.
To check the error, refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error Code
Check Method".

OFF

The PLC may exhibit the following status:
1) The positioning instruction turns ON, and operation
is being performed in the forward rotation direction.
2) An operation error occurred during positioning. The
instruction, the4refore, is not being executed.
To check the error, refer to the following section:
→ Refer to Subsection 13.2.1 "Error Code
Check Method".

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

13 Troubleshooting

Built-in Positioning Functions

Error Check

Common Items

13.2

13.2 Error Check

13.2.1 Error Code Check Method

Apx.

Connect a personal computer to the PLC.
Diagnose the PLC.
On the tool menu bar, click on "Diagnostics", and then "PLC diagnostics" to diagnose the cause of the PLC
error.

Check the diagnosis result.
The following window will appear. Check the details of the error shown on the window.

Display of
conditions of
LEDs on FX
PLC

The PLC error
is displayed.

The help function of
GX Developer opens,
and you can check
the details of the
error code.

B - 175

Example
Connection

1
2

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

This section describes how to check the error codes using GX Developer.
If the display module is being used, use the "error check" function of the display module to check the error codes.
For details on the operation of the display module, refer to the following manuals:
→ FX3G Hardware Edition.
→ FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

13 Troubleshooting

Built-in Positioning Functions

13.2 Error Check

13.2.2 Error Codes
This section describes the error codes related to the positioning instructions. For details on the error codes,
refer to the following manual.
→ Refer to the programming manual.
Error
code

Operation
after
detecting
error

Description of error

Troubleshooting

Operation error [M8067 (D8067)]
0000

6705

6706

6760

6763

6764

B - 176

No error detected
The device specified by the operand of the
applied instruction is a wrong device.

This error occurs during operation. Check the program or
the operand of the applied instruction.
Even if no syntax error or circuit error is detected, an
operation error may occur for the following reason:
Example:
The device number or the data specified by
T500Z is not an error. However, if Z = 100, the result of
the operand of the applied instruction is out of operation will be T600. This means that the device
the specified range.
number is out of the specified range, and an operation
error will be detected.
Sum error of ABS data sent from servo
Operation amplifier
will be
1) The input (X) specified by the DSZR,
continued.
DVIT, or ZRN instruction is already being
used for another instruction.
2) The interruption signal device number
specified by the DVIT instruction is
outside the setting range.

The pulse output number is already being
used for a positioning instruction or pulse
output instruction (PLSY, PWM,etc.).

Check the servo amplifier for disconnection. Also check
the set data.
1) Check that the input (X) specified by the DSZR, DVIT,
or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following
items:
- Input interruption (including delay function)
- High-speed counter (C235 to C255)
- Pulse catch (M8170 to M8177)
- SPD instruction
2) Check the data set in D8336
(interruption signal designation device for DVIT
instruction).
Check that the output specified as the pulse output
destination is not being activated by another positioning
instruction.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

13.3 If the Servo Motor or the Stepping Motor Does Not Operate

If the Servo Motor or the Stepping Motor Does Not Operate

Common Items

13.3

13 Troubleshooting

If the servo motor or the stepping motor does not operate, check the following items.
1) Check the wiring condition.

2) Execute the positioning instruction, and then check the statuses of the following LED indicator lamps.
→ For details on lamp statuses, refer to Subsection 13.1.5.
- LED indicator lamp of the output specified as the pulse output destination
- LED indicator lamp of the output specified as the rotation direction output device

Check that the pulse output stop command flag is off.
→ For details on the pulse output stop command flag, refer to Subsection 4.3.2.
The following table shows the pulse output stop command flag of each pulse output destination device
(Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003).
Pulse output destination
device

Pulse output stop
command flag

Y000

M8349

Y001

M8359

Y002

M8369

Y003

M8379

Operation
During pulse outputting operation, if the pulse output stop
command flag of a corresponding pulse output destination
device is turned on, the pulse outputting operation will be
immediately stopped.

5) Check that the limit switch (forward or reverse rotation limit switch) is not activated.
→ For details on the normal and reverse rotation limits, refer to Subsection 4.3.1.
The following table shows the forward and reverse limit relays of each pulse output destination device
(Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003).
Pulse output
destination
device

Corresponding instruction and stop
Forward limit
relay

Reverse limit
relay

Y000

M8343

M8344

Y001

M8353

M8354

Y002

M8363

M8364

Y003

M8373

M8374

PLSV instruction
(M8338 = OFF)
If the corresponding rotation
limit relay is turned on, the
pulse output (operation) will
immediately stop.

DSZR, DVIT, ZRN,
PLSV(M8338 = ON), DRVI,
and DRVA instructions
If the corresponding rotation
limit relay is turned on, the
speed will decelerate, and the
operation will stop.

6) Check the operation timing of the positioning instruction.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is on, and if a positioning instruction (excluding the ABS
instruction) or pulse output instruction (PLSR, PLSY) uses the same pulse output destination device, the
instruction cannot be executed.
If the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is still on after the instruction activation contact is turned
off, do not execute a positioning instruction (including PLSR and PLSY instructions) that uses the same
output number.
Before activating such an instruction, check that the "pulse output monitor" (BUSY/READY) flag is off,
and then wait until at least 1 scan time is completed.
Pulse output destination device

Pulse output monitor flag

Y000

M8340

Y001

M8350

Y002

M8360

Y003

M8370

B - 177

Apx.
Example
Connection

3) Verify that the same pulse output method is being applied for both the PLC and the servo amplifier (drive
unit).
→ For details on the pulse output method, refer to Subsection 4.6.1.
→ For details on high-speed output special adapter setting method,refer to Subsection 4.5.2.

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

→ For output specifications, refer to Section 2.5.
→ To connect the MELSERVO Series, refer to the examples of connection shown in the Appendix.
→ For details on the servo amplifier (drive unit), refer to the manual of your unit.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Built-in Positioning Functions

13.4

13 Troubleshooting
13.4 If Operation Is Stopped at a Wrong Position

If Operation Is Stopped at a Wrong Position
If operation is stopped at a wrong position, check the following items.
1) Check whether the electronic gear of the servo amplifier (drive unit) is set properly.
→ For the electronic gear setting method of the MELSERVO Series, refer to Subsection 4.6.2.
2) Check whether the origin is set properly.
• Properly set the DOG so that the near-point signal (DOG) can be kept ON until the speed is reduced to
the creep speed. The zero return instruction will start speed reduction at the front end of the DOG, and
will stop the operation at the rear end of the DOG or at detection of the first zero-phase signal after
passing the rear end of the DOG. After that, the current value register will be cleared (reset to "0"). If
the speed is not reduced to the creep speed before detecting the rear end of the DOG, the operation
may not be stopped at the specified position.
• The creep speed should be slow enough. The zero return instruction will not reduce the speed before
stopping. For this reason, if the creep speed is not slow enough, the operation may not be stopped at
the specified position due to inertia.
• Devices for the near-point signal (DOG)
- DSZR instruction
If an input (X000 to X017)*1 of the main unit is specified for the near-point signal (DOG), the rear end
of the near-point signal (DOG) will be monitored (detected) at 1-ms intervals (interruption). Under the
following condition, however, monitoring (detection) of the near-point signal (DOG) rear end may be
affected by the input time constant or the scan time of the sequence program, and the operation may
not be stopped at the specified position.
a) An input number of X020 or below (or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.)) is specified.
*1.When using an FX3U-16M, FX3UC-16M, specify an input in the range of X000 to X007.
X000 to X007 for FX3G PLC (main unit).

- ZRN instruction
If an input (X000 to X007) of the main unit is specified for the near-point input signal, the PLC
interruption function will be used to stop the operation. Under the following condition, however,
operation may be affected by the scan time of the sequence program, and the operation may not be
stopped at the specified position.
a) An input number of X010 or below (or other device (auxiliary relay, etc.)) is specified. If an input
relay X010 or below is specified for the near-point signal, the input filter (10 ms) will apply.
• If the DSZR instruction is used:
Since the zero-phase signal of the servo motor is used, adjust the relation between the rear end of the
DOG and the zero-phase signal as shown in the following figure. If fine adjustment of the origin
position is needed, adjust the position of the near-point signal (DOG).
Rear end
DOG
Zero-phase signal

3) If reciprocating operation (operation in the forward rotation direction and then reverse rotation direction) is
not stopped at the specified position: The built-in positioning function cannot correct the mechanical
backlash (clearance, play) during positioning operation. If it is necessary to correct the backlash,
preliminarily set the number of output pulses considering the backlash that may be caused when
changing the transfer direction.
Table
Feed screw

Backlash
(clearance, play)

B - 178

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

A
Common Items

B
Built-in
Positioning
Functions

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable
Controllers

Apx.
Example
Connection

User's Manual [Positioning Control Edition]
Appendix: Example Connection

Foreword
To use the positioning function of the MELSEC-F FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC described in this manual, the
PLC should be connected to a servo amplifier drive unit. The Appendix, therefore, describes how to connect
the PLC to a servo amplifier drive unit and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use
the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Apx. - 1

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Description of Manual (Example of Connection)
In this manual, the following formats are used for describing the examples of connection:
Shows the title of the manual and the title
of the division.
This area shows the title of the manual
and the title of the division for the current
page.
1st line: Shows the title of the manual.
2nd line: Shows the title of the division.

Shows the title of the chapter
and the title of the section.
This area shows the title of the chapter
and the title of the section for the
current page.

Indexes the division titles.
The right side of each page indexes the title
of the division for the current page.

Shows the reference.
This area shows the reference
document (the reference
document is shown next to " ").
If the reference is in
"Appendix: Examples of
Connection", the chapter, section,
or item number only will be
shown next to " " .

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

Apx. - 2

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 1: MELSERVO-J3 Series

Example Connection

Appendix 1-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

Appendix 1. MELSERVO-J3 Series
Appendix 1-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Appedix 1-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output

Apx.

1. FX3U/FX3G PLC
100 to 240V AC
L
N
Class-D
grounding*1
Photocoupler

S/S
0V
24V
X000

24V DC

MR-J3A
Series servo
CN1 amplifier
DICOM 20
DOCOM 46

OPC 12

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X004
X010

DOG

LG
OP

34
33

Servo ready
(RD)

X014

COM1

Pulse train

Y000
COM2

CN1
21
23
24
25
48

DOCOM 46

Zero speed*4
Positioning completed(INP)
Torque being controlled*4
Servo error(ALM)

Servo ON*4
Reset

42 EMG

Emergency stop

43 LSP
44 LSN
47 DOCOM

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

Direction
NP

CN1

Y007

Y020

ZSP
INP
TLC
ALM

15 SON
19 RES

Y004

COM1

DICOM

CN1

X017

FX2N-16EYT

Example
Connection

FX3U-32MT/ES

CLEAR signal
CR
SD

25
22
23
46
15
17
18

ABST
ABSB0
ABSB1
DOCOM

SON
ABSM
ABSR

*4
Connected to the
FX3U if the ABS
instruction (FNC 155)
is used.

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
1.3.1-1.

Plate

Y027

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

Immediate stop command
Zero return command
JOG(+)command
JOG(-)command
Forward rotation positioning command
Reverse rotation positioning command
Forward rotation limit (LSF)*3
Reverse rotation limit (LSR)*3
Stop command

X037

Apx. - 3

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection
*1.

Appendix 1. MELSERVO-J3 Series
Appendix 1-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side.
Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit switches on the servo
amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Servo motor
Reverse rotation
*4.

Apx. - 4

Forward rotation

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 1: MELSERVO-J3 Series

Example Connection

Appendix 1-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

2. FX3UC PLC
MR-J3A
Series servo
CN1 amplifier

FX3UC-32MT/D

DICOM 20

24V DC
Class-D
grounding*1

COM

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X000
X004

34
33

Servo ready
(RD)

DOG*2

X014

X017

Pulse train
Direction

Y004

DOCOM 46

Zero speed*4
Positioning completed(INP)
Torque being controlled*4
Servo error(ALM)

Apx.

15 SON
19 RES

Servo ON*4
Reset

42 EMG

Emergency stop

43 LSP
44 LSN
47 DOCOM

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3
*4
Connected to the
FX3UC if the ABS
instruction(FNC
155) is used.

CN1

Y017

FX2NC-16EYT

ZSP
INP
TLC
ALM

CN1
RD

COM1
COM1
Y000

DICOM

COM1
COM1
Y020

CLEAR signal
CR
SD

41
Plate

Y027

Example
Connection

X010

LG
OP

CN1
21
23
24
25
48

25
22
23
46
15
17
18

ABST
ABSB0
ABSB1

FX2NC-16EX
FX2NC-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
1.3.1-2.

DOCOM

SON
ABSM
ABSR

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

COM
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

X037
*1.

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation
*4.

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Photocoupler

OPC 12
DOCOM 46

Forward rotation

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

Apx. - 5

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 1. MELSERVO-J3 Series

Example Connection

Appendix 1-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

Appendix 1-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

Appedix 1-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output (Transistor), and Differential Line Driver Output

24V DC

MR-J3A
Series servo
CN1 amplifier
DICOM 20
DOCOM 46

OPC 12

FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Epuivalent to
AM26C31

Pulse train
(Forward rotation
pulse train)*5

Y0/2+
Y0/2Y4/6+
Y4/6SGA

SGA

FX3U-32MR/ES

PP
PG
NP
NG

10
11
35
36

Direction signal
(Reverse rotation
pulse train)*5

100V to
240V AC

CN1
21
23
24
25
48

DICOM

ZSP
INP
TLC
ALM

Zero speed*4
Positioning completed(INP)
Torque being controlled*4
Servo error(ALM)

CN1
N
S/S
0V
24V

Photocoupler

Class-D
grounding *1

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X000
X004
X010

Servo ready
(RD)

DOG*2

X014

LG
OP

34
33

COM1

CLEAR signal

Y020

Servo ON*4
Reset

42 EMG

Emergency stop

43 LSP
44 LSN
47 DOCOM

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

DOCOM 46

X017

FX2N-16EYT

15 SON
19 RES

CR
SD

CN1
25
22
23
46
15
17
18

ABST
ABSB0
ABSB1
DOCOM

SON
ABSM
ABSR

Plate

Y027

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

X037

Apx. - 6

*1.

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*4
Connected to the
FX3UC if the ABS
instruction(FNC
155) is used.

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
1.3.1-1.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

*5.

Set the pulse output form by pulse output form setting switch.

Apx.

Pulse output method

FP RP side

Forward/reverse pulse train

PLS•DIRside

Pulse train + direction

Example
Connection

Pulse output method setting switch
•

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Servo motor

*4.

Appendix 1-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function"

Appendix 1-3-1 Sink Input and Sink Output
1. FX3U/FX3G PLC
FX3U-32MT/ES
L
N

Photocoupler

FX2N-16EYT

S/S
0V
24V
X000

100V to 240V AC

Class-D
grounding *1

MR-J3A
Series servo
CN1 amplifier
DOCOM 46
DICOM 20

24V DC

COM1
Y020
Y021
Y022
Y023

Servo-ON
ABS transfer mode
ABS request

SON 15
ABSM 17
ABSR 18

Y27

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X031
X032
X033

ABS(bit0)
ABS(bit1)
Send data ready

ABSB0 22
ABSB
ABSB1 23
1
ABST 25
SD

Plate

X037
*1.

A
Common Items

*3.

Appendix 1: MELSERVO-J3 Series
Appendix 1-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

Apx. - 7

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Appendix 1. MELSERVO-J3 Series
Appendix 1-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

2. FX3UC PLC
MR-J3A
Series servo
CN1 amplifier

FX3UC-32MT/D
24V DC

DICOM 20
DOCOM 46

Photocoupler

FX2NC-16EYT

COM
X000

COM1
COM1
Y020
Y021
Y022
Y023

Class-D
grounding *1

Servo-ON
ABS transfer mode
ABS request

SON 15
ABSM 17
ABSR 18

Y027

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

COM
X020
X031
X032
X033

ABS(bit0)
ABS(bit1)
Send data ready

ABSB0 22
ABSB1 23
ABST 25
ABST
SD Plate

X037
*1.

Apx. - 8

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Example Connection

Appendix 2-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series
Appendix 2-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Appendix 2-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output
1. FX3U/FX3G PLC

Apx.

100 to
240V AC
L

MR-J2(S)A
Series servo
amplifier
10
3
13
6
18
19

N
Class-D
grounding*1
Photocoupler

S/S
0V
24V

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X000
X004
X010

DOG*2

CN1A
LG
OP

1
14

Servo ready
(RD)

X014

X017
COM1

Pulse train

Y000
COM2

SG
PP

CR
SD

Plate

Y004

Y007

FX2N-16EYT

COM1
Y020
Y027

Torque being controlled*5
Servo error(ALM)
Zero speed*5

CN1B
5 SON
14 RES

Servo ON*5
Reset

15 EMG

Emergency stop

16 LSP
17 LSN
20 SG

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

10
3

Direction

CN1B
SG
VDD
COM
TLC
ALM
ZSP

Example
Connection

FX3U-32MT/ES

4
19
6
10
5
8
9

CN1B
DO1
ZSP
TLC
SG
SON
ABSM
ABSR

*5
Connected to the
FX3U if the ABS
instruction (FNC
155) is used.

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
2.3.1-1.

CLEAR signal
8

CN1A
COM 9

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

OPC 11
Positioning
1NP 18
completed(INP)
Immediate stop command
Zero return command
JOG(+)command
JOG(-)command
Forward rotation positioning command
Reverse rotation positioning command
Forward rotation limit (LSF)*3
Reverse rotation limit (LSR)*3
Stop command

X037

Apx. - 9

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Example Connection
*1.

Appendix 2-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation

Apx. - 10

Forward rotation

*4.

For details on the internal power supply of MR-J2 (S) servo amplifier, refer to the following manual.

*5.

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

→ For details, refer to the servo amplifier manual.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Example Connection

Appendix 2-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

2. FX3UC PLC
FX3UC-32MT/D
24V DC
Class-D
grounding *1

COM
X000

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X004
X010

DOG

CN1A
LG
OP

Servo ready
(RD)

X017
COM1
COM1
Y000

Pulse train
Direction

Y004

SG
PP

10
3

B
CN1B
SG
COM
TLC
ALM
ZSP

CN1B
5 SON
14 RES

Servo ON*4
Reset

15 EMG

Emergency stop

16 LSP
17 LSN
20 SG

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

Y017

FX2NC-16EYT

COM1
COM1
Y020

CLEAR signal
CR
SD

Y027

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

Positioning
completed(INP)
COM
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

8
Plate

CN1A
COM 9
OPC 11
INP 18

Torque being controlled*4
Servo error(ALM)
Zero speed*4

4
19
6
10
5
8
9

CN1B
DO1
ZSP
TLC
SG
SON
ABSM
ABSR

*4
Connected to the
FX3UC if ABS the
instruction(FNC
155) is used.

FX2NC-16EX
FX2NC-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
2.3.1-2.

X037
*1.

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation
*4.

Forward rotation

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

Apx. - 11

Apx.
Example
Connection

X014

MR-J2(S)A
Series servo
amplifier
1
10
14
13
6
18
19
19

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Photocoupler

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Example Connection

Appendix 2-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

Appendix 2-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

Appendix 2-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output (Transistor), and Differential Line Driver Output
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Epuivalent to
AM26C31

Pulse train
(Forward rotation
pulse train)*6

Y0/2+
Y0/2Y4/6+
Y4/6SGA

SGA

FX3U-32MR/ES

CN1A
PP
PG
NP
NG

Direction signal
(Reverse rotation
pulse train)*6

100V to
240V AC

MR-J2(S)A
Series servo
amplifier
10
3
3
13
13
2
6
12
18
19

N
S/S
0V
24V

Class-D
grounding*1

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X000
Photocoupler

X004
X010

Servo ready
(RD)

DOG*2

X014

LG
OP

1
14

SG
RD

10
19

X017

FX2N-16EYT

COM1

CLEAR signal

Y027

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

Immediate stop
command
Zero return command
JOG(+)command

Servo ON*5
Reset

15 EMG

Emergency stop

16 LSP
17 LSN
20 SG

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

4
19
6
10
5
8
9

CN1B
DO1
ZSP
TLC
SG
SON
ABSM
ABSR

COM 9
INP 18
Positioning
completed(INP)

JOG(-)command
Forward rotation positioning command
Reverse rotation positioning command
Forward rotation limit (LSF)*3
Reverse rotation limit (LSR)*3
Stop command

X037

Apx. - 12

Torque being controlled*5
Servo error(ALM)
Zero speed*5

CN1B
5 SON
14 RES

CR 8
SD Plate
CN1A

Y020

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

CN1B
SG
VDD
COM
TLC
ALM
ZSP

*1.

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*5
Connected to the
PLC if the ABS
instruction (FNC
155) is used.

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
2.3.1-1.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Appendix 2-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Servo motor

*4.

Forward rotation

For details on the MR-J2(S) servo amplifier, such as the tolerance for the internal power and operation of the servo
amplifier, refer to the following manual.

→ For details, refer to the servo amplifier manual.

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

*6.

Set the pulse output method using the pulse output method setting switch.

Pulse output method setting switch

Pulse output method

FP RP side

Forward/reverse pulse train

PLS DIR side

Pulse train + direction

•

Appendix 2-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning"

Appendix 2-3-1 Sink Input and Sink Output
1. FX3U/FX3G PLC
FX3U-32MT/ES
L
N

Photocoupler

FX2N-16EYT

100V to 240V AC

Class-D
grounding *1

S/S
0V
24V
X000

MR-J2(S)A
Series servo
CN1B amplifier

SG 10
COM 13
VDD 3

COM1
Y020
Y021
Y022
Y023

Servo-ON
ABS transfer mode
ABS request

SON
ABSM
ABSR

5
8
9

Y027

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X031
X032
X033

ABS(bit0)
ABS(bit1)
Send data ready

DO1 4
ZSP 19
TLC 6
SD Plate

X037
*1.
*2.

Apx.
Example
Connection

*5.

A
Common Items

*3.

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).
For details on the MR-J2(S) servo amplifier, such as the tolerance for the internal power and operation of the servo
amplifier, refer to the following manual.

→ For details, refer to the servo amplifier manual.

Apx. - 13

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Appendix 2. MELSERVO-J2 (-Super) Series
Appendix 2-3 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)

2. FX3UC PLC
MR-J2(S)A
Series servo
CN1B amplifier

FX3UC-32MT/D

COM 13

24V DC
Photocoupler

FX2NC-16EYT

COM
X000

COM1
COM1
Y020
Y021
Y022
Y023

Class-D
grounding *1

Servo-ON
ABS transfer mode
ABS request

SON
ABSM
ABSR

5
8
9

Y027

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

COM
X020
X031
X032
X033

ABS(bit0)
ABS(bit1)
Send data ready

DO1 4
ZSP 19
TLC 6
SD Plate

X037
*1.

Apx. - 14

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 3. MELSERVO-H Series

Example Connection

Appendix 3-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

Appendix 3. MELSERVO-H Series

Appendix 3-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Appendix 3-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output

Apx.

FX3UC-32MT/D

Example
Connection

24V DC
Photocoupler

Class-D
grounding*1

COM
X000

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X004
X010

DOG*2

MR-HA
Series servo
CN1 amplifier
LG
OP

28
33

Servo ready
(RD)

X014

RD 49

X017
COM1
COM1
Y000

Pulse train
Direction

Y004

COM1
COM1
Y020

CLEAR signal

Zero speed*4
Positioning completed(INP)*4
Torque being controlled*4
Servo error(ALM)

CN1
Servo ON*4
Reset

NPO 19

46 EMG

Emergency stop

38 LSP
39 LSN
40 SG

Forward rotation limit 2*3
Reverse rotation limit 2*3

SG 17
CR 37
SD 50

FX2NC-16EX

COM
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

SG
VIN
ZSP
PF
TLC
ALM

12 SON
15 RES

Y027

Photocoupler

CN1
40
20
23
24
25
48

SG 47
PP0 18

Y017

FX2NC-16EYT

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

CN1
24
23
25
16
12
44
45

PF
ZSP
TLC
SG
SON
D13
D14

*4
Connected to the
FX3UC if the ABS
instruction(FNC
155) is used.

FX2NC-16EX
FX2NC-16EYT
Refer to Appendix
3.2.1.

X037

Apx. - 15

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Appendix 3. MELSERVO-H Series
Appendix 3-2 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*1.
*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation
*4.

Forward rotation

To detect absolute positions, connect this line to the PLC.

Appendix 3-2 Absolute Position Detection (Transistor Output)
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Incorporated Positioning"

Appendix 3-2-1 Sink Input and Sink Output
1. FX3UC PLC

FX3UC-32MT/D

CN1

MR-HA
Series servo
amplifier

VIN

SG
SON
DI3
DI4

16
12
44
45

PF
ZSP
TLC
SD

24
23
25
50

24V DC
Photocoupler

COM
X000

FX2NC-16EYT

COM1
COM1
Y020
Y021
Y022
Y023

Class-D
grounding *1

Servo-ON
ABS transfer mode
ABS request

Y27

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

COM
X020
X031
X032
X033

ABS(bit0)
ABS(bit1)
Send data ready

X037
*1.

Apx. - 16

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Example Connection

Appendix 4-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Appendix 4-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function".

Appendix 4-1-1 Sink Input and Sink Output

Apx.

FX3U-32MT/ES

Example
Connection

1. FX3U/FX3G PLC
100 to 240V AC
L
24V DC

N
Class-D
grounding*1
Photocoupler

MR-CA
Series servo
amplifier

S/S
0V
24V

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X000
X004
X010

DOG*2

CN1
OP

CN1
12 SG
20 V24
19 OPC

Servo ready
(RD)

X014

1 V+
2 ALM

Servo error(ALM)

14 LSN
15 LSP
17 SON

Forward rotation limit 2*4
Reverse rotation limit 2*4
Servo ON

X017
COM1

Pulse train

Y000
COM2

SG
PP

5
9

CR
SD

13
11

Direction

Y004

Y007

FX2N-16EYT

COM1
Y020

CLEAR signal

Y027

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

X037

Apx. - 17

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection
*1.

Appendix 4-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

Set the servo amplifier parameter No.21 to "020".

*4.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Servo motor
Reverse rotation

Apx. - 18

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Forward rotation

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Example Connection

Appendix 4-1 Main Unit (Transistor Output)

A
Common Items

2. FX3UC PLC
FX3UC-32MT/D
24V DC
Class-D
grounding*1

COM
X000

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X004
X010

CN1
OP

MR-CA
Series servo
amplifier

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Photocoupler

Servo ready
(RD)

DOG*2

Example
Connection

X014

Apx.
*3

CN1

X017
COM1
COM1
Y000

Pulse train
Direction

Y004

SG
PP

5
9

12 SG
20 V24
19 OPC
1 V+
2 ALM

Servo error(ALM)

14 LSN
15 LSP
17 SON

Forward rotation limit 2*4
Reverse rotation limit 2*4
Servo ON

Y017

FX2NC-16EYT

COM1
COM1
Y020

CLEAR signal
CR 13
SD 11

Y27

FX2NC-16EX
Photocoupler

COM
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

X037
*1.

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

Set the servo amplifier parameter No.21 to "020".

*4.

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Servo motor
Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

Apx. - 19

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

Example Connection

Appendix 4-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

Appendix 4-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter
To assign the inputs/outputs, refer to the following section.
→ Refer to Section 12.1 of "B. Built-in Positioning Function"

Appendix 4-2-1 Sink Input, Sink Output, and Differential Line Driver Output
24V DC

FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Epuivalent to
AM26C31

Pulse train
(Forward rotation
pulse train)*5

Y0/2+
Y0/2Y4/6+
Y4/6SGA

SGA

FX3U-32MR/ES

Direction signal
(Reverse rotation
pulse train)*5

100V to
240V AC

MR-CA
Series servo
CN1 amplifier
PP 9
PG 10
NP 7
NG 8

CN1
12 SG
20 V24
19 OPC

N
S/S
0V
24V
X000

Photocoupler

Class-D
grounding*1

Zero Point
signal(PG0)

X004
X010

SG
OP

X014

Servo error(ALM)

14 LSN
15 LSP
17 SON

Forward rotation limit 2*4
Reverse rotation limit 2*4
Servo ON

5
4

Servo ready
(RD)

DOG*2

1 V+
2 ALM

CR
SD

13
11

X017

FX2N-16EYT

COM1

CLEAR signal

Y020
Y027

FX2N-16EX-ES/UL

Photocoupler

S/S
X020
X021
X022
X023
X024
X025
X026
X027
X030

X037
*1.

Apx. - 20

Be sure to use the class-D grounding method (grounding resistance: 100 Ωor less).

*2.

Near-point signal (DOG)

*3.

Set the servo amplifier parameter No.21 to "020".

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

To ensure safety, use the forward rotation limit switch and the reverse rotation limit switch on both sides: the PLC side and
the servo amplifier side. Note that the limit switches on the PLC side should be activated slightly earlier than the limit
switches on the servo amplifier side.

Reverse rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSR

Forward rotation limit 1
(Programmable
controller side)
LSF

Forward rotation limit 2
(Servo amplifier side)

Reverse rotation

Built-in
Positioning
Functions

Servo motor

*5.

A
Common Items

*4.

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series
Appendix 4-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

Forward rotation

Set the pulse output method using the pulse output method setting switch.
Pulse output method

FP RP side

Forward/reverse pulse train

PLS•DIR side

Pulse train + direction

•

Apx.
Example
Connection

Pulse output method setting switch

Apx. - 21

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Example Connection

Appendix 4-2 High-Speed Output Special Adapter

MEMO

Apx. - 22

Appendix 4. MELSERVO-C Series

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Warranty

Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be
repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses
to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any
re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.

[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from
Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6)
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after
manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis
warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range]
1)

The range shall be limited to normal use within the
usage state, usage methods and usage environment,
etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc.,
given in the instruction manual, user's manual and
caution labels on the product.
Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be
charged for in the following cases.
a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or
handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software
design.
b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc.,
to the product by the user.
c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a
user's device, Failure that could have been
avoided if functions or structures, judged as
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
d) Failure that could have been avoided if
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.)
designated in the instruction manual had been
correctly serviced or replaced.
e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by
usage beyond the specified Life of contact
(cycles).
f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning,
wind and water damage.
g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by
scientific technology standards at time of
shipment from Mitsubishi.
h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of
production
1)

Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.

Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary
loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not
be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss
in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third
person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or
not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or
technical documents are subject to change without prior
notice.

6. Product application
1)

In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic
controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
application will not lead to a major accident even if any
problem or fault should occur in the programmable
logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the
device for any problem or fault.

The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has
been designed and manufactured for applications in
general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the
public could be affected such as in nuclear power
plants and other power plants operated by respective
power companies, and applications in which a special
quality assurance system is required, such as for
Railway companies or Public service purposes shall
be excluded from the programmable logic controller
applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or
property that could be greatly affected, such as in
aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel
devices, manned transportation, equipment for
recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall
also be excluded from the programmable logic
controller range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be
possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
requirements of the project, and providing that all
parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at the users discretion.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition

Revised History

Date

Revision

Description

7/2005

First Edition

2/2006

• The transistor output for FX3U Series was added.
- A.Common items
(Subsection 1.2.1 and 1.2.2, Section 2.1 and Subsection 3.1.1).
- B.Built-in positioning function
(Section 1.1, Subsection 1.5.2 and 1.5.3, Section 2.3, Subsection 2.5.1, Section
4.9, Subsection 6.3.1, 8.2.1 and 8.3.1, Section 9.1 and 10.1).
- Appendix:Example connection
(Appendix 1-1-1, 1-3, 2-1-1 and 4-1-1).
• FX3U-20SSC-H was added.
- A.Common items
(Subsection 1.2.1, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Subsection 3.1.3 and Section 3.2)
• Other
- Section-number changed Revision A (Revision B)
A.Common items: Subsection 3.1.3 (3.1.4)
B. Built-in positioning function: Subsection 2.5.1 (2.5.2) to 2.5.2 (2.5.3)
- Correction of errors

11/2007

• FX3UC (D, DSS) Series PLC added.
• Correction of errors

11/2008

• FX3G Series PLC added.

3/2009

• The transistor output (source type) for FX3G Series was added.
• Explanation corrections for manufacturer’s serial number.

USER'S MANUAL - Positioning Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN

MODEL

FX3U-U-POS-E

MODEL CODE

09R620

JY997D16801E
(MEE)

Effective March 2009
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Modify Date                     : 2009:03:25 11:07:41+09:00
Create Date                     : 2009:03:24 16:44:59+09:00
Author                          : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Subject                         : JY997D16801E
Page Count                      : 242
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:03711764-5d2b-45a4-8cc8-9c67209824e0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 5.5.6p145J
Metadata Date                   : 2009:03:24 18:04:22+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:d34390d0-795c-474d-a631-76a9bc32b418
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL - Positioning Control Edition
Creator                         : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Description                     : JY997D16801E

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Mitsubishi Electronics Digital Coffeemaker Fx3U Users Manual FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER'S Positioning Control Edition

FX3U to the manual 3050be44-8381-48f4-a5fc-0b4c6a95dede

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation